Home

4To create a Function Key Object

1. Icon Name Description DI New Starts a new font file 5 Open Opens an existing font file a Save Saves the font file S Cut Not currently used Right click on any character to copy paste or clear it Copy Not currently used Right click on any character to copy paste or clear it Paste Not currently used Right click on any character to copy paste or clear it El Print Not currently available gl About Used to show the version of EasyASCIIFontMaker N Help Not currently available E Edit Puts the application into Edit mode so that characters can be modified View x1 Shows how the characters look in various Zoom modes View x2 Shows how the characters look in various Zoom modes LI View x3 Shows how the characters look in various Zoom modes E View x4 Shows how the characters look in various Zoom modes Toggle In Edit mode using this format allows you to click once to fill a square in the character block Click again to clear the square On In Edit mode this format always fills a square when it is clicked D Off In Edit mode this format always clears a square when it is clicked mj None Use this format to ensure that no characters are changed The EasyBuilder Application This section guides you in how to operate the EasyBuilder application However it does not show you how to program your OIT or how to create graphics objects These topics are reserved for later chapte
2. PLC Host OIT PLC communication cable Connecting the HMI530 550 to a PC and a PLC Now that you are familiar with using simulation mode the next chapter guides you through the fundamental operation of three primary segments of the EZware 500 configuration software 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 35 Chapter 4 Using EZware 500 Overview The EZware 500 software is composed of three separate applications which are accessible from the EZware 500 folder EasyBuilder EasyManager and EasyASCIIFontMaker EasyBuilder is the application software used to create a project file EasyManager is a utility application that puts the OIT into different operating modes Finally the EasyASCIIFontMaker program allows you to modify the text fonts that are used in EasyBuilder By the end of this chapter you should be quite familiar with the operation of EasyManager and FasyASCIIFontMaker You will also be able to maneuver around EasyBuilder easily This will pave the way for actually creating graphics objects in later chapters The EasyManager The EasyManager utility sets the communications parameters that are used by the computer when communicating to the OIT The utility can also be used to change the operating mode of the OIT The following illustration shows the various commands available com 1 115200 bps Project Download Uploa
3. Standard Tighten all screws printer cable pas Communication cable specific for the PLC Host twisted pair foil shielded 23AWG minimum if included on cable Example of Wiring a Silver Series OIT to a PLC STEPS 1 Connect the OIT end of the communication cable into either the RS 232 port or the RS 485 port as required for your application OIT housing is marked 2 Tighten the two cable screws at each end to ensure shield ground path 3 Route the communication cable to the PLC Refer to the OIT Cable Routing section for more information 4 Connect the PLC end of the cable to the PLC and tighten the cable screws 5 Connect the green shield wire from the cable to earth ground onthe PLC If this wire is not present make the ground connection inside the PLC connector 6 The HMIS30T S5SOT has a printer port and can be connected to an Epson compatible printer Panel Preparation A metal panel or mounting surface with a minimum thickness of 15 gauge 0 059 inch 3 3mm if cold rolled steel or hardened steel or 10 gauge 0 101 inch 2 6mm if aluminum alloy 6061 T6 preferred is required Thinner panels or surfaces may bow between the mounting clamps and not form a seal with the gasket The area of the panel or mounting surface where the gasket comes into contact must be flat and free of scratches pits and other features that prevent the gasket from sealing properly If the panel
4. Window No Verify the following sections In the Read Address section e Device Type LB e Device Address 100 Window No 50 Click OK To save compile and simulate the keypad 1 9 NAAR YWH Select File Save from the menu listings File name Name the project Click Save Select Tools Compile to compile the project Click COMPILE After the computer has compiled the project click CLOSE Select Tools Offline Simulation from the menu listings The offline simulator with your project appears Once in Simulation mode click on the Numeric Input object The Decimal keypad should appear Enter 1234 The value is entered into the register 10 Press the ENT key The Decimal keypad automatically closes 1010 1001a Rev 02 212 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 1010 1001a Rev 01 213 Chapter 10 Bar Graphs Meters and Trends This chapter focuses on three special graphic objects which can be used to display PLC data registers You read in Chapter 6 how to use shapes and bitmaps to represent the data in PLC registers as states You also read how to use alphanumeric data fields to display the contents of PLC registers as either numbers or ASCII characters We now introduce three more options to display the data in PLC registers Bar Graph Objects Trend Display Objects Meter Display Objects Creating Bar Graphs The Bar Graph Object is use
5. 3 Enter the Title Name for the label and how many states the new label requires For example a label Titled Start requiring 2 states to represent separate conditions where condition one status is START condition two is STOP 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating and Using Databases and Languages 157 4 Ts Click the OK button and the new label is added to the database The Name will appear in a selectable listing of available Labels for use with objects that support text field labeling The new label is still selected Click the Modify button to display the Label Content Setting dialog In the State No list pulldown box select the state that the text is representing In each Language box as desired enter the text representing that state in each language For example START in Language 0 to represent English and the appropriate equivalent wording in all other languages configured If further text labeling is required to represent conditions or status in additional states while still in the Modify mode for Label Content Setting select the state requiring text labeling Enter the text in the Language boxes as above z There is no inter language conversion or translation capability Entries must be made using the correct wording for the language designated to display as entered 10 Continue to add state descriptive text labeling as required When all text has been entered for all
6. data display Format Options Range Description specifies number of digits to display for example 2 y a digits displays 9 to 99 any number that cannot be No above Dec 1 10 displayed with the specified number of digits is represented with asterisks Decimal with Raw No below Dec 0 10 specifies number of digits to the right of the decimal point 2147483648 to This is the lowest data value allowed when the OIT Decimal with Do conversion Inguriow 2147483647 operator enters a number Input high 2147483648 to This is the highest data value allowed when the OIT p a 2147483647 operator enters a number No above Dec 1 10 specifies number of digits to the left of the decimal point No below Dec 0 10 specifies number of digits to the right of the decimal point 2147483648 to This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data Input low 2147483647 register font aly 2147483648 to This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data put high 2147483647 register Engineering low 2147483648 to 2147483647 This is the lowest data value that you would like displayed on the OIT and the minimum value the OIT operator is allowed to enter Engineering high 2147483648 to 2147483647 This is the highest data value that you would like displayed on the OIT and the maximum value the OIT operator is allowed to enter Hex No above Dec Not App
7. 1010 1001a Rev 02 230 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 4 Click OK to close the Set System Parameters dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears Using Events EasyBuilder has two parts that are used to perform Event functions the Event Log object and the Event Display object The Event Log object monitors events and alerts the Event Display when an event is triggered The Silver Series monitors a maximum of 200 events but you can program the OIT to monitor up to an additional 1000 events Monitoring Events With the Event Log Object The Event Log Object continuously monitors PLC coils and registers to determine if an event has occurred Once an event has triggered the Event Log Object directs a string of characters associated with that event to the Event Display Object for display on the OIT screen The OIT operator can acknowledge each event by touching the string of characters that have been displayed Once acknowledged the Event Log Object has the option of calling a popup window gt To create an Event Log Object Ei 1 From the Parts menu click Event Log Or click the Event Log icon in the Draw toolbar The Event Log Object dialog box appears Event Log Object Address Trigger Condition Content 1010 1001a Rev 02 Capturing Alarms and Events 231 Event Log Object s Address type Read address Device type Attribute Event trigger Print Category Con
8. Set value Constant used Range 32768 to 65535 Set at backlight off Automatically places a 16 bit constant into a PLC register when the backlight screen saver feature causes the OIT backlight to shut off Set value Constant used Range 32768 to 65535 Set at Enter success Writes the specified value to the Write Address when the numeric keypad s Enter key is pressed and the data is valid The Set Word object must be placed on the same window as the Numeric Input Object Set at Enter fail Writes the specified value to the write address when the numeric keypad s Enter key is pressed and the data is invalid The set word object must be placed on the same window as the numeric input object Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab Note that it is not required to use a shape or a bitmap In some modes such as Set at window open or Periodical JOG you may prefer to place the part on the window without a shape or bitmap tied to it Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab Click OK The Create Set Word Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the
9. 235 1010 1001a Rev 02 236 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Place these objects onto the screen as shown gt Create an Event Log object to monitor alarms 1 From the Parts menu click Event Log Or click the Event Log icon in the Draw toolbar The Event Log Object dialog box appears 2 Enter the following parameters for each event Attribute Setting Address type Bit Read Address LBO to LB4 Event trig On Water Level Low LBO Fuel Level Low LB1 Text Coolant Level Low LB2 Pump Motor Fault LB3 Pump Motor Overload LB4 Font 16 Color Select any color Write value 0 3 Click OK The entries should look like this Event Log Object Address Trigger Condition Content LBO On None Wate Level Low LB1 On None Fuel Levelo Low LB2 On None Coolant Level Low LB3 On None Pump Motor Fault Delete EDS On None Pump Motor Overlo 1010 1001a Rev 02 Capturing Alarms and Events 237 gt Create an Event Display object to display alarm history 1 From the Parts menu click Event Display Or click the Event Display icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Event Display Object dialog box appears 2 Enter the following parameters for each event Tab Attribute Setting General Read Address LWO BIN Write Address LW1 BIN Event Display Display Line 3 Character length 31 Text Space 0
10. v PLC block pack 0 To configure PLC settings 1 Select the appropriate PLC driver from the PLC pull down menu 59 7 You can export a project created for one PLC brand to a different PLC brand by loading the project file into EasyBuilder then entering a different PLC type in this box EasyBuilder will go through your entire project and attempt to change each reference to PLC data registers to a logical selection for the new PLC protocol however se strongly recommend that you review these changes to assure that they are satisfactory 2 Ifyou haven t already done so select the appropriate OIT model 7 You can export a project created for one OIT model to a different OIT model If the original project was created for the 4 shade blue OIT changing to the color version causes EasyBuilder to select a standard set of colors to represent each blue shade 3 Set the serial port type the OIT will use to communicate with the PLC 1010 1001a Rev 02 60 10 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual RS232 Uses the OIT s 9 pin female connector labeled PLC RS232 The following selections use the OIT s 9 pin male connector labeled PLC RS485 PC RS232 RS485 default The selected protocol determines 2 or 4 wire RS485 4W Forces RS485 4 wire configuration RS485 2W Forces RS485 2 wire configuration Ethernet Uses the RJ45 10BaseT connector
11. 263 Printing a Report 263 Introduction 1 Introduction Welcome Welcome to the Maple Systems Silver Series of Operator Interface Terminals OITs Using graphic OITs has never been easier This powerful family of graphics operator interface terminals connects to programmable logic controllers PLCs to provide the human machine interface in industrial applications The Silver Series has several features not found in other graphic OITs This manual explains the operation of the Silver Series OITs and how to implement the many available features using the EZware 500 Configuration Software EZware Support OIT Models Supported For the latest list of Silver Series Models supported by EZware please visit our website at http www maple systems com PLCs Supported For the latest list of PLCs and controllers supported by the Silver Series OITs please visit our website About Your Documentation Maple Systems provides many resources to allow you to get the most out of your Silver Series OIT e Silver Series Operation Manual shipped with EZware 500 as a PDF file describes installation general operation and features of the Silver Series using EZware 500 configuration software e Controller Information Sheets important information specific to each supported protocol e EZware 500 On line Help covers the operation of EZware Always available by clicking Help Topics from the Help menu in EasyBuilder For more info
12. Address Function Access Description These bits can be used for any object that needs to be initially set 9000 9009 On after OIT reset R W when OIT is initialized 9010 Recipe Download Indicator RdOnly This bit is set when a recipe is downloading to the PLC 9011 Recipe Upload Indicator RdOnly This bit is set when a recipe is uploading from a PLC 9012 ees RdOnly This bit is set when a recipe is download or uploaded to a PLC 9013 Taskbar Touch indicator RdOnly This bit is set when the touch indicator on the taskbar is pressed 9014 Taskbar CPU indicator RdOnly This bit is set when the CPU indicator on the taskbar is pressed 9015 Taskbar Alarm indicator RdOnly This bit is set when the Alarm indicator on the taskbar is pressed 9016 Printer Error Indicator RdOnly This bit is set when the OIT is unable to print to the printer This bit can be used to temporarily disable the printer port on the OIT Set the bit to disable the printer port Clear the bit to 9017 Printer Control Bit R W enable Note You must enable the printer option in the Edit Set System Parameters General tab menu of EasyBuilder 9018 9019 Reserved for future use 9020 Message Board Pen option R W Set this bit to select Pen mode for the Message Board feature 9021 Message Board Brush option R W Set this bit to select Brush mode for the Message Board feature 9022 Message Board Clip option R W Set this bit to select Clip mode for the Message Board feature 9023 9029 Reserved for fu
13. Reads two 16 bit registers Register 1 determines the state of the shape displayed Register 2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis The OIT places the shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position For example if Input low 0 Input high 10 Scaling low 0 and Scaling high 100 then when the value in the PLC register increases by 1 the shape moves right along the X axis by 10 pixels No of states Range 1 to 32 X axis w scali AA This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range MEOW 32767 to 32766 Input high di highest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range 0 32767 Scaling low This is the low scaled value Scaling high This is the high scaled value Reads two 16 bit registers Register 1 determines the state of the shape displayed Register 2 determines the position of the shape along the Y axis The OIT places the shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position For example if Input low 0 Input high 10 Scaling low 0 and Scaling high 100 then when the value in the PLC register increases by 1 the shape moves down along the Y axis by 10 pixels No of states Range 1 to 32 Y axi li axis wscaling This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range Iriput low 32767 to 32766 Inout high This is the hig
14. Creating Windows 99 occurred then try using the Direct Window object on the Common Window more about the common window later in this chapter e Ifyou want to display one of many possible popup windows on any full screen window then try using the Indirect Window object on the Common Window You can then let the PLC determine which popup window should be displayed or you can create several Set Word objects to allow the OIT operator to select which window to look at more about the Set Word object in a succeeding chapter e Ifyou want to display a child popup window within a parent popup window then it is best to use either the Indirect or Direct Window object not the Function Key object even when you want the OIT operator to press a key to display the child popup window Using the Function Key object causes the popup window to be displayed at the Window Setting position regardless of the location of the parent window This means that the child window could appear outside of the parent window s area especially if the parent window can be moved about the OIT screen By using the Indirect or Direct Window object the child window will always be located within the parent window even when the parent window has moved To allow the OIT operator to press a key to display the child popup window configure a Set Word or Set Bit object to trigger the Indirect or Direct Window object more about Set Word and Set Bit objects in a succeeding chapter
15. Managing Electrostatic Discharge It is best NOT to remove the rear enclosure of the OIT When the rear part of the enclosure is removed the circuitry inside is exposed to possible damage by electrostatic discharge during handling Minimize the possibility of electrostatic discharge by e Discharging personal static by grounding yourself prior to handling the OIT e Handling the OIT at a static free grounded workstation e Connecting the frame ground connector of the OIT to a clean earth ground e Placing the OIT in an anti static bag during transport CE Compliance The Silver Series OITs have been tested to conform to European CE requirements per Council Directive 89 336 EEC The European Union created these requirements to ensure conformity among products traded in those countries Specifically the Silver Series OITs meet or exceed the noise emissions and immunity requirements as set forth in the EN50081 Emissions and EN50082 Immunity standards These products are designed to withstand electrical noise in harsh industrial environments They also conform to requirements that limit electrical emissions However this does not guarantee that the products will be totally immune from possible malfunction in cases where severe electrical noise occurs Therefore we strongly recommend that you follow the guidelines outlined in this chapter for proper wire routing and grounding to insure the proper operation of the Silver Series OIT NEMA Rati
16. e A control statement will branch the flow of the program expression The TestExpression is required A Case statement will evaluate the TestExpression and determine a numeric value The program will then test each case that matches and will perform all the statements within its block If a Break is reached the program flow will jump directly to the End Select statement bypassing all other Case conditions not one word Avoid using Case statements at this time case logic is testing to be erratic e Ifno case s match the program branch will execute the Case Else statement s e The ending statement End Select is written as two words Format Examples Select Case Status Case 0 Return 1 Select Cas TestExpression sl Case statements n e Case Else Case 7 else statements Return 8 End Select Case Else Return 0 End Select A looping control statement is used for looping a pre determined number of times For counting up use the keyword To For counting down use the keyword Down Counter Necessary The counter of looping control It can be integer o character Start Necessary The initial value of Counter End Necessary The end value of Counter Step Options The increment decrement step of Counter It can be integer an can be omitted when value is 1 Statements e Optional Statement block between For and Next whic
17. 1 Upper Half For Address 0 To 29999 SetData Address LW Binplc 9000 1 LW 9000 incr through memory SetData Initial RWI Binplc 30000 1 RWI 0 indirect address is Upper ext Address SetData Done LB Binplc 1 1 Turn off the bit that called the macro End Macro Command Using 32 bit Registers Within Macros When reading or writing a 32 bit 2 word register that is external to the macro using GetData or SetData you must use an array of 2 16 bit shorts Internally the macro can use an int type variable to store a value up to 2 147 483 647 a signed 32 bit register But when using the GetData or SetData functions it only does a 16 bit external transfer even though it may be declared as int 32 bit This routine writes Hex value 0x12345678 to a 32 bit holding register short Data 2 int value 0x12345678 split 32 bit value into 2 16 bit values Data 1 value amp 0xFFFF0000 gt 16 store the MSW Data 0 value amp 0x0000FFFF store the LSW store the 2 16 bit values into LW14 and LW15 SetData Data 0 LW Binplc 14 2 This routine reads a 32 bit holding register short Data 2 grab a 32 bit register 2 16 bit value from a PLC register address 4x 1 GetData Data 0 4x Binplc 1 2 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 253 This routine puts 2 16 bit array variables into one 32 bit variable Int LVal short Data 2 LVal
18. Click gt Retum to normal es E _ Event trigger time C Acknowledge time C Short time format H M C Extended date format Y M D 8 Select the type of options the Event Display uses Function Range Description Selects how many events to display in the scrollable window The number of lines refers to Display line 1 to 60 lines that are size 16 font If the Event text string is size 24 font then two lines are required for every event displayed Character Selects how long the scrollable window is Select a length which is equal to the maximum lenath 1 to 80 length of the largest event text string If Size 24 font is used for the event text string then two 9 characters are required for each character in the text string Tad pace 0to5 Select this option to insert extra rows of pixels between each event text string displayed In pagg other words this sets the spacing between the lines of the scrollable window This setting determines what the OIT operator must do to acknowledge a triggered event To Acknowledge ia acknowledge an event the OIT operator must either click or double click press the same spot yie A twice quickly on the touch screen where the event string of the triggered event is located 9 Inthe Color frame select what type of colors the Event Display uses for some of the functions Function Description Acknowledae If the condition
19. Data 1 lt 16 Data 0 Using Floating Point Registers Within Macros Reading and writing external floating point registers can only be used in a macro as a transfer function The macro routine has no functionality to interpret an external floating point formatted IEEE 754 format register Although a variable can be declared as a float type within the macro it can not store the external float register properly When reading or writing a 32 bit floating point also call a real register that is external to the macro using GetData or SetData you must use an array of 2 16 bit shorts Internally the macro can use an int type variable to store a value up to 2 147 483 647 a signed 32 bit register But when using the GetData or SetData functions it only does a 16 bit external transfer even though it may be declared as int 32 bit This routine will not work a GetData of more than one element requires a variable that is declared as an array float RealData get the floating point register and store it in RealData GetData RealData F8 Binplc 1 2 This routine reads a 32 bit holding register short Data 2 grab a 32 bit register 2 16 bit value from a PLC register address 4x 1 GetData Data 0 4x Binplc 1 2 Statements Conditions 8 Expressions An expression combines constants variables arrays functions and operators under certain rules Expressions
20. Landscape Cancel 4 Landscape mode is the standard display mode for conventionally installed OITs Portrait mode configures display on OITs installed at right angles Landscape Portrait A project s display mode may be changed after the initial selection has been made To set Display Mode select Edit System Parameters and select the Hardware tab To change the Display Mode resize the window s resolution to fit the mode selected 5 Click OK The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with a blank work area 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 41 al To open an existing project Ss 1 On the File Menu click Open or click the Open icon in the Standard toolbar The Open dialog box appears 2 Click on the project file you intend to open 3 Click Open The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the initial screen of the project displayed gt To close a project 1 On the File Menu click Close If changes have been made to the project file EasyBuilder will ask you if you would like to save the project Then the main screen of EasyBuilder will remain but with no work area displayed You must now use the Open or New commands to edit a project gt To save an existing project Al 1 On the File Menu click Save or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar 2 Ifthe project already has a name then the project will automatically be saved If this is a new project then the S
21. SILVER SERIES INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL Maple ystems 808 134th Street SW Suite 120 Everett WA 98204 7333 USA Phone 425 745 3229 Fax 425 745 3429 E mail maple imaple systems com Web www maple systams com COPYRIGHT NOTICE This manual is a publication of Maple Systems Inc and is provided for use by its customers only The contents of the manual are copyrighted by Maple Systems Inc reproduction in whole or in part for use other than in support of Maple Systems equipment is prohibited without the specific written permission of Maple Systems WARRANTY Maple Systems warrants each product to be free from electrical and mechanical defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of shipment This warranty does not apply to defects in the Products caused by abuse misuse accident casualty alteration negligence repair not authorized by Maple Systems use on current or voltages other than specified by Maple Systems or application or installation not in accordance with published instruction manuals This warranty is in lieu of any other warranty either expressed or implied Maple Systems liability is limited to the repair or replacement of the Product only and not costs of installation removal or damage to user s property or other liabilities If Maple Systems is unable to repair or replace a nonconforming Product it may offer a refund of the amount paid to Maple Systems for suc
22. To export the label library 1 Click Export CSV File The Open dialog box appears 2 Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data 3 Click Open To import the label library 1 Click Import CSV File The Open dialog box appears 2 Browse for the CSV file that contains the labels 3 Click Open Using the Label Library Once entries have been made to the Label Library they can be used with any object that supports text field labeling 1 Select an object that supports text field labeling as required On the Label tab for the object s Attributes check the Use Label Library checkbox The Label Index list will be enabled containing all of the labels in the database 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating and Using Databases and Languages 159 Set Word Object s Attributes E xi General Shape Label Profile Attribute Color Font 16 7 Align Left y State fo y Label Index lang Content 2 Select the applicable label from the list The label will display on the object representative for states and languages as entered in the Label Library dialog 3 Once created with Labels assigned objects can be viewed displaying the various text labeling in each of the states detailed in each of the languages utilized To view on EZBuilder s Standard Toolbar select the state and language for objects displayed on the window The object s text labeling display will change according to the s
23. 10 Place the new Function Key object somewhere on Window 10 Below is an illustration of what the default common window Window 30 alternate common window and Window 10 startup window might look like Default Common Window 30 Window 10 EasyBuilder Ebpri2 Window 6 Common Window EasyBuilder Ebpri2 Window 10 initial EG File Edt View Option Draw Pats Library Tool Window EB Ele Edt Vew Option Diem Pats Libia Tool Wndow EB File Edt View Option Draw Parts Libray Tool Window uea ee Font 16 D S tal J lee oela isel 8 22 a AE FPC 1010 1001a Rev 02 108 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual When the OIT initializes it displays the startup screen Window 10 and the default common window To change common windows we press the CCW function key that we have configured to change the common window to Window 30 Window 30 remains the common window until another function key object is pressed that changes the common window or until the OIT is reset Using the Fast Selection Window In the last section you read that common windows are great for displaying information that should be displayed all the time regardless of which base windows are active However you may create projects that require a window that is always accessible like a common window but not always displayed For example you may want a numeric keypad available for any data entry Howeve
24. 170 The Bit Lamp Object 170 The Set Bit Object 173 The Toggle Switch Object 175 Representing PLC Data Registers 177 The Word Lamp Object 177 The Set Word Object 179 The MultiState Switch Object 182 The Numeric Data Object 184 The Numeric Input Extend Object 187 The ASCII Data Object 191 The ASCII Input Extend Object 192 The Moving Shape Object 194 The Animation Object 197 Chapter 9 Using and Creating Keypads 201 How to Create a Keypad 201 Displaying and Using a Keypad 204 Using the Built In Numeric Keypad in EasyBuilder 207 Chapter 10 Bar Graphs Meters and Trends 213 Creating Bar Graphs 213 Creating Display Meters 216 Creating Trend Displays 218 Creating XY Plots 220 Chapter 11 Capturing Alarms and Events 223 Using Alarms 22005 223 Monitoring Alarms with the Alarm Scan Object ceeded Reda eee eee sas 223 Displaying Alarms using the Alarm Display A aaa a a arar ES 224 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Displaying Alarms using the Alarm Bar Object iii ii 228 Using Events Monitoring Events With the Event Log ObleCt noma aca ta 230 Displaying Events Using the Event Display Object 232 Using Events for an Alarm History 234 Using the Alarm History 2
25. 7 Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window Setting dialog box Click Close to return to the EasyBuilder main screen Instead of using a solid background color you can select a pattern that is displayed in the background of a window gt To select a background pattern 1 From the Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears 2 Click on the window that you wish to change the background pattern Click Setting The Window Setting dialog box appears 3 Inthe Background frame section check the Filled box 4 Click the pull down arrow of the Color box The Color dialog box appears 5 Select from one of the 16 basic colors or add 16 new colors from the customized list of colors To create a customized color click on one of the boxes in the Customized color box then click Customize color 6 The color table dialog box appears allowing you to select one of the 256 colors available 7 Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window Setting dialog box 8 Click the pull down arrow of the Pattern Color box and select a color Note to use the background pattern the color selected for Pattern Color must be different then the color selected for the solid color 1010 1001a Rev 02 92 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 9 Once a pattern color is selected click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window Setting dialog box 10 Click the pull down arrow of the Patter
26. Click Delete bitmap The bitmap is removed from the library Click Close to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder Creating Graphic Objects 147 6 Save the project file to permanently save changes made to the library Caution once the project is saved the bitmap is permanently deleted from the library Finally you may want to export a bitmap located in one of the bitmap libraries so that it can be modified or used in other programs To export a bitmap 1 From the Library menu click Bitmap then Call up library The Bitmap Library dialog box appears Select the library that the bitmap is located in Click on the shape that you want to export Click Export The Save As dialog box appears In the File name box enter a file name to store the bitmap in Click Save The bitmap is saved and the Bitmap Library reappears Click Cancel to exit the Bitmap Library and Cancel again to exit the Create Bitmap Object dialog box App obs Using Group Libraries Any graphics object or objects displayed on the work area of EasyBuilder can be grouped together and stored into a group library Graphics objects can be passive or active The groups that you create can be permanently stored into the group libraries for access by any project Creating group objects often saves a lot of time when creating new projects because you can use the same objects repeatedly For example suppose you regularly use a scale meter similar to the follow
27. E f 3 2 Highlight the shape by clicking the mouse and dragging a rectangular outline so that it covers the entire shape When you are done you should see small black squares around the perimeter of the shape 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 137 3 From the Library menu click Shape then Save to library Or click the Save Objects to Shape Library icon in the Standard toolbar The Save to Library dialog box appears Save to Library 4 Click the Shape library box and select the library you wish to store the shape in for this example eggs 5 Click the Shape No pull down box to select the location 0 to store the shape Note that the State No will automatically change to 0 first unused state 6 Enter a title for the new shape in the Description box 1010 1001a Rev 02 138 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 7 Click OK The Shape Library dialog box appears with the shape stored in the library Shape Library Shape library v State 0 v Lo Lt 2 Ji jL4 Js Je JE je Js Jao 01 12 13 14 15 15 17 OC 0 Untitled 1 Untitled 2 Untitled 3 Untitled A Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled Background Frame gt Select Lib Unattach Lib Delete Shape Place CANCEL 8 Click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder 9 From the File menu click Save to save the shape to the library Important
28. EasyBuilder only accepts bitmaps that are 256 color or less resolution gt To add a new bitmap to a library PANA Display the Bitmap Library dialog box Click the Bitmap Library pull down box and select one of the bitmap libraries Click on the box location where you would like to enter the new bitmap Click Add Bitmap The Import Bitmap dialog box displays Import Bitmap x Bitmap Bitmap No ia Bitmap name Total states fi Cancel The Bitmap No is the location of the bitmap in the bitmap file This should reflect the box location that you selected in step 4 Enter a title for the new bitmap in the Bitmap name box Enter the total number of states max 32 for the bitmap in the Total states box 1010 1001a Rev 02 144 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 8 Click Next The Get Bitmap Graphics dialog box appears Get Bitmap Graphics 9 Click Browse to search for the bitmap The Open dialog box appears Select the bitmap file and click Open 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 145 10 The Get Bitmap Graphics dialog box reappears with the bitmap displayed along with information about the bitmap Get Bitmap Graphics x Bitmap file CAEBSO0 Project Earth bmp State 0 Width uc Height pesa Size 4148bytes Colors 256 I Transparent 9 128 128 Finished Cancel 11 The Transparent checkbox is used to make any color selected on t
29. Select the library that the group is located in For this example select keypad Click on the group that you want to place on the work area For this example select item 0 Click Place The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with the group in the upper left corner of the work area Move the group object to the preferred location on the window Creating Graphic Objects 151 This completes our discussion on creating shapes bitmaps and group objects with EasyBuilder This chapter also provided some examples on how to use the drawing tools The next several chapters describe the many parts or active graphics objects that can be placed onto windows 1010 1001a Rev 02 152 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating and Using Databases and Languages 153 Chapter 7 Creating and Using Databases and Languages EZBuilder includes the ability to create and use both a Tag Database Library and a Label Database Library The Tag Library is a database of PLC register addresses Once created the Tag Database allows individual object address assigning through Tag selection from the Tag Library The Label Library is a database of text labels Once created the Label Database allows individual object text labeling through Label selection from the Label Library The Label text may also be represented in up to 4 languages each selectable for display Creating and Using the Tag Library The Tag Library is a data
30. This will highlight the entire object Now click on the label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Bit Lamp Object s Attribute dialog box The Set Bit Object The Set Bit Object is used to write a value to a PLC coil The touchscreen object displays the State 0 shape until pressed When pressed it displays the State shape and executes the function that was assigned to it 1010 1001a Rev 02 174 gt To create a Set Bit Object 1 From the Parts menu click Set Bit Or click the Set Bit icon in the Part1 toolbar The Create Set Bit Object dialog box appears Create Set Bit Object q E Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual HHH General Shape Label Description Write address Device type LB v Device address fo 7 Aux M Attribute Style Toggle Apply Cancel Help 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Set Bit part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Write address frame select the PLC coil or OIT internal memory address 4 Inthe Attribute frame select how you want the Set Bit object to operate Style Option Description ON Sets a PLC coil when pressed OFF Clears a PLC coil when pressed Toggl
31. attributes Direct Window Object s Attributes x General Profile Position Pinned x 74 Y 50 Size Width 56 Height 56 Cancel Apply Help 7 Click the Profile tab to change the position or the size of the Direct Window Object Note that the size does not refer to the size of the popup window since the size of the popup window is determined in the Window Settings dialog box This size refers to the area of the Direct Window Object which is analogous to a box in which the popup window is to be placed Ifthe size is too small then the popup window will appear clipped when displayed Similarly if the size of the Direct Window Object is larger than the actual size of the popup window the excess space will be blank 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 97 gt To calla popup window using the Indirect Window Object ES RA 1 Fromthe Parts menu select Indirect Window The Create Indirect Window Object dialog box appears Create Indirect Window Object x General Description Calling a popup window using a PLC register Read address Device type DM y Device address fo BIN No of words fi y T Aur Cancel Apply Help 2 Inthe General Tab select the PLC address according to Device Type and Device Address 3 Select BIN or BCD format 4 No of Words is currently set to 1 and cannot be changed This represents a 16 bit PLC data register 5 Click OK to retur
32. cannot be changed 1 Select the object you wish to lock 2 From the Edit menu click Pinned or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar 3 To unlock the object deselect Pinned from the Edit menu or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar General Settings The final section of this chapter shows all the settings or parameters that can be configured using EasyBuilder From the Edit menu click System Parameters The System Parameter Setting dialog box appears The dialog box has six tabs PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware and Aux 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 PLC Settings Configuration System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux PLC type Multiple HMI Local Default route HMI model PLC I F port Data bits Stop bits Parameter 1 Parameter 3 Parameter 5 Connect I F Server P address Subnetwork mask PLC time out constant sec Omron C Series and CQM1 v HMI550H 640x 480 RS 485 default v 7 Bits HMI station no Disable Serial Baud rate Panity Tum around delay Parameter 4 Parameter 6 PLC station no HMI HMI link speed IP address IP address
33. e g int RPM 75 Use the assignment operator to initialize a value to the variable Variables can be declared and initialized in the following manor Stacked Example Inline Example separate like types with a comma short a 0 short b 0 short c 0 short a 0 b 0 c 0 Variables contain an unknown random value when declared Variables must be initialized before they are used Array Initialization Formats int MyArray 10 char LetterArray 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MYWORD The initial values are written within the brackets and are divided by comma These values are assigned in order from left to right starting from array index 0 Constants A constant is a numeric or boolean value that does not change Constants may be written as any of the following Written As Examples Decimal constant 1234 short MyVal 1234 Hexadecimal constant OxFA20 short MyVal 0xFA20 ASCII code character constant ABCD char String 4 ABCD Boolean True not zero False zero True 1 False 0 bool Done 0 or bool Done False Reserved Words The following symbols and names are keywords that are reserved for use by macros They cannot be used as a complete name in any function name array name or variable name However the reserved words may be contained within a variable name such as my_int TheEnd etc And down int Step bool
34. however the three commands probably take less time than the two commands because the OIT has to receive data for ten registers R1 R10 in one command takes more time than the overhead associated with two commands Therefore you should experiment with this setting if you find that the update rate is longer than you would like Now that you know your way around EZware 500 and its various applications it is time to start creating your own project The next seven chapters show you in detail all of the features that you can use to create a user friendly touch screen graphics operator interface terminal Along the way we will attempt to provide you with clear definitions of each feature and if necessary some additional examples of how each feature might be used Restart the OIT Automatically after a Project is Downloaded EasyBuilder can automatically start the application that was just downloaded gt To enable automatic restarting of the OIT 1 From the Option menu select Window Property The Window Property dialog box is displayed 2 Check the Jump To Application When Download Done checkbox 3 Click OK to exit the Window Property dialog box Automatically Save and Compile the Project EasyBuilder can automatically save and compile the project when downloading or simulating gt To enable automatic save and compile 1 From the Option menu select Window Property The Window Property dialog box is displayed 2 Check the Automatic Save
35. the OIT operator can change the operation mode of the message board by pressing the Pen Brush or Clip keys The Pen Style can be changed by pressing the Thin Normal and Thick keys The Pen Color is changed by pressing the Red Blue or Green keys Finally any messages written on the board by the OIT operator can be erased by pressing the Clear Board key 1010 1001a Rev 02 123 Creating Your First Project To write on the message board we recommend that you use some dull pointed device such as a retractable pen that won t mar or leave a permanent mark on the OIT s touch screen Then practice your penmanship Alla 7 MIL E Name 1010 1001a Rev 01 124 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 1010 1001a Rev 01 Creating Graphic Objects 125 Chapter 6 Creating Graphic Objects Drawing Objects To display any graphics objects on the OIT screen you must either create them using the drawing tools included with EasyBuilder import them from another applications program or select from the many choices available in the graphics libraries included with EasyBuilder This chapter shows you how to create use and save graphics objects in EasyBuilder You have learned from previous chapters how graphics objects are placed onto windows In this chapter we concentrate on how to create graphics objects Using the Drawing Tools Several drawing tools are provided in EasyBuilder to make it easier to create graphi
36. the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 7 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the attributes of the Alarm Display by double clicking on the part 1010 1001a Rev 02 226 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Using the scrollable window feature Let s go through an example to illustrate how the Alarm Display Object is used with the scrollable window First use the Alarm Scan Object to create five alarms Alarm Scan Object Address Alarm Content Water Level Low Add LBI On Fuel Level Low Dita Coolant Level Low Pump Motor Fault Delete Pump Motor Overload Tripped Setting Create five Set Bit objects with the Toggle attribute that can write to OIT coils LB0 4 Place these onto a startup screen of EasyBuilder Create a Text Object with the string Alarm Display Finally create two Set Word Objects with the Add value JOG attribute and Sub value JOG attribute that increment decrement by 1 Both parts should use OIT register LWO These two objects shall be used to adjust the scrolling window of the Alarm Display Object When you have finished the startup screen should look like the following 1010 1001a Rev 02 Capturing Alarms and Events Now create an Alarm Display object with the following attributes Alarm Display Object s Attributes Description Read address Device type Sample Alarm
37. 1 From the Library menu click Shape then click Call up library Or click the Call up Shape Library icon from the Standard toolbar The Shape Library dialog box appears 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 135 Let s look at the Shape Library dialog box Shape Library Shape library RC Y State 0 Loj JC2JJ60J65 6 7 l0 J00662036465 06 7 IIL 0 Untitled 1 Untitled 2 Untitled 3 Untitled PLL 4 Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled Background J Frame JE Select Lib Unattach Lib Delete Shape Place ok _j __cancer_ The Shape Library provides several options which are discussed in the following sections Accessing and Creating Shape Libraries You can open close or even create new shape libraries easily using the Shape Library dialog box To open other shape libraries 1 With the Shape Library dialog box displayed click Select Lib The Open dialog box appears 2 Select which library you would like to open then click Open The Shape Library dialog box reappears with the selected library displayed If the project has ten libraries open you may want to close a library so that another one may be opened gt To close or unattach an open shape library 1 With the Shape Library dialog box displayed click the pull down box of Shape library and choose from one of the open libraries of shapes 2 Select which library you would like to close th
38. 2 3 4 and 5 As you enter the digits each one should appear in the Numeric Input Object box 5 Press the Del key to delete digit 5 6 Try pressing any of the alpha characters A Z Notice that alpha characters are not accepted into a Numeric Input Object register 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using and Creating Keypads 207 10 11 Press the Clear key Notice that the entire register is cleared to 0 Enter digits 5 4 3 2 1 and then press the Enter key Notice that the last digit is still blinking and two short beeps occur This indicates that the value entered is out of range Press the Clear key and enter 32767 Press the Enter key Notice that this value is accepted and blinking stops Touch the Numeric Input Object register again to activate editing mode Enter five more digits then press the Ese key Notice that the entry is cancelled and the previous number 32767 is restored Change the value of the ASCII Input register Touch the ASCII Input Object to activate the edit mode Using the keypad enter the character string HELLO THERE As you enter the characters each one should appear in the ASCII Input Object box Press the Enter key to send the characters to the OIT internal data register Using the Built In Numeric Keypad in EasyBuilder An alternative to using the numeric keypads from the EasyBuilder libraries is using the keypad located in Window 50 of the EasyBuilder software There are three steps to using the bu
39. 9050 is used to mimic the master current window in the Slave unit Remember a windows PLC control object writes back in the next address 9052 9053 Reserved for future use 9054 Report Printout Option R W 0 print text meters and trends 1 print text meters trends and shapes but without pattern 2 print text meters trends and bitmaps 3 print text meters trends bitmaps and shapes but without pattern 4 print everything 9055 PLC Control Object word offset R W This controls how the PLC Control Object using the Change Window or Report Printout features is used If a non zero number is placed into this register then the OIT will automatically add this number to the number retrieved from the PLC register assigned to the PLC Control Object to arrive at the new screen to display or printout For example if LW9055 10 and the PLC Control Object Change Window feature reads the value of 2 from the PLC register assigned to it then the OIT will place Screen 12 onto the display LW9055 2 12 Note when writing to the next consecutive register the OIT will still only write the value placed into the PLC register assigned to the PLC Control object 9056 Reserved for future use 1010 1001a Rev 02 168 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 9057 Even
40. And Compile At Download And Simulate checkbox 3 Click OK to exit the Window Property dialog box Compact Flash Compact Flash CF cards enable one to download an EZware project from a PC to a compact flash card and then put that card into the OIT and download the project to the OIT This eliminates the need for a laptop or PC at the installed OIT s location and makes downloading the same project to multiple OITs simple 1010 1001a Rev 02 70 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Any CF Type flash card may be used that has been formatted for the FAT format and has a memory size equal to or greater than 64MB gt To store the file from the PC to the Compact Flash Card 1 Open ImageCF exe located in the EZware folder The following screen will appear 2 Press the magnifying glass to browse for your project s eob file Press open and ImageCF exe automatically converts the eob file to an ImageCF bin file which will create itself in your EZware directory 3 Copy the ImageCF bin file to the Compact Flash card Using Windows Explorer drag the ImageCF bin onto your Compact Flash Reader device 4 Insert the Compact Flash card into an OIT 5 Find the Dip Switches on the back of the OIT Set Dip Switch 2 On then push the Reset button or cycle power The OIT will show some text and at the bottom right side of the screen a green button will appear Press the green button and the OIT will load the pro
41. Creating a moving window The popup windows that you create for display on the OIT can be configured so that the OIT operator can touch the window and touch somewhere else on the OIT display to move the window to that location To create a popup window that can be moved you must perform the following steps 1 Create a popup window 2 Adda Function Key object with the Window Bar attribute in the popup window The best way to show how this is done is to go through an example Creating a moving window 1 Create a new window that is 150 x 100 pixels similar to Window 13 shown below Note that it really doesn t matter what type of objects are displayed in the window 2 From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box is displayed 3 Click Window Bar Click the Shape tab Click Use Shape Click on the Shape Library command Select Shape 0 from the button1 library Click OK to return to the Create Function Key Object dialog box 5 Click the Label tab Click the Use label checkbox 6 Enter the text Window 13 into the Contents box Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box and go back to the EasyBuilder main screen 7 Place the new Function Key object somewhere on Window 13 Reenter the Function Key Attributes dialog box by double clicking on the Function Key object 8 Click the Profile tab Select X 4 and Y 4 Select Width 119 and Height 21 9 Click OK 10 Wind
42. DATA2 OUT 5 DATA3 OUT 6 DATA4 OUT 7 DATA5 OUT 8 DATA6 OUT 9 DATA7 OUT 11 BUSY OUT 15 ERROR IN 16 INIT OUT 17 25 GND The HMI504T HMI520T Models do not support a printer Configuring Die HMI530T 550T for a Printer From EasyBuilder s Edit menu select System Parameters i Select the General tab 3 Inthe Print area near the bottom of the dialog box set the Printer to the desired printer If None is selected no printing will occur 4 Ifeach printed Event is to have a unique serial number printed with it check the Print Sequence Number checkbox 5 Ifeach printed Event is to have the current time printed with it check the Print Time Tag checkbox 6 Inthe drop down list select how the HMI530T 550T is to handle printer errors e No error detection Printer errors are not detected and data is lost e Error detection show message The HMI displays a printer error message and the data to print is buffered until the printer is ready e Error detection set local bit The OIT sets local bit LB9016 and the data to print is buffered until the printer is ready Bit LB9016 is cleared when the printer is ready e The Sequence Number and Time Tag options apply only to Event data Printed Windows will not have a Sequence Number or Time Tag printed with them 1010 1001a Rev 02 262 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Printing a Window There are two ways to print a window e Using a functi
43. Devices There are 4 types of Recipe devices Recipe Word RW Indexed address Recipe words RWT Rn Device Ral Device Recipe Bit RB and Indexed address Recipe Bit RBI The usage of RW and RB devices is the same Therefore in the following discussion Rn refers to both RW and RB devices and RnI refers to both RWI and RBI devices Refers to a direct Rn address That is the value placed in the Address field of an Rn device refers directly to the Rn address For example Rn100 refers directly to the data at address Rn100 An address with an Rnl device is an Indexed address The address referred to by an Rnl device is actually the specified address plus an indexed offset The offset is the value in address LW9000 For example suppose address LW9000 contains the value 50 and the Address field of an RnI device is set to 100 This ndexed address actually refers to the data at address Rn150 z RB devices use the same memory area as the RW devices The RB device allows Bit level access to recipe data The bit address is specified by using the RW address followed by the bit number 0 F hex For example Bit RBO is Bit 0 in RWO Bit RW2047F is Bit 16 in RW2047 Rn Devices Vs RnI Devices Ral devices Rn devices Indexed address devices are most useful when it is necessary to page through a number of recipes Rnl devices allow a single window to manage all recipe items Conversely the use of Rn devices requires a separate
44. Displays messages according to events that occur in the PLC Alarm Scan Contains the data for detecting alarm conditions System Message Customizes the content of system generated messages PLC Control Configures the OIT to monitor PLC data registers to display full window screens Event Log Monitors and records assigned events 0 2 RE ago Data Transfer Configures the OIT to periodically transfer data stored in one set of registers to another set of registers in the OIT or PLC 1010 1001a Rev 02 Installation of OITs 7 Chapter 1 Installation of OITs Before You Begin Please read the following for proper handling of your new OIT Unpacking the Unit Carefully unpack the OIT Please read any instructions or cautions that appear on the shipping container Check all material in the container against the enclosed packing list Maple Systems Inc will not accept responsibility for shortages against the packing list unless notified within 30 days The equipment and its accessories were inspected and tested by Maple Systems before shipment all of the equipment should be in good working order Examine the equipment carefully if any shipping damage is evident notify the carrier immediately You are responsible for claim negotiations with the carrier Save the shipping container and packing material in case the equipment needs to be stored returned to Maple Systems or transported for any reason
45. EZware 500 configuration software Windows Fundamentals An operator interface terminal wouldn t be very useful if all of the information to be displayed could only be placed onto one screen Therefore most OITs have multiple screens that you can use to display information The Maple Systems Silver Series is capable of storing up to 1999 windows actual limit is determined by memory requirements of each screen giving you maximum flexibility in designing your operator interface We prefer to call these screens windows because they have several features not normally associated with screens e Windows can be created in any size You can make the window full sized so that it fits the entire area of the OIT display or you can create a window that partially covers the display e Windows can be overlaid on top of each other A maximum of six windows can be displayed on the OIT at any given time All data on each window displayed is updated continuously regardless of whether or not it is covered up by another window e Windows can be easily moved about the OIT display to allow portions of other windows to come into view e Windows can be minimized to an icon on the bottom of the OIT display This feature allows the plant floor operator to minimize windows that contain data such as numeric keys which don t need to be seen all the time and yet must be readily available The Silver Series has three basic types of windows available for use Base
46. Edit System Parameters General settings dialog box of 9014 Local month bcd 0 11 R W EasyBuilder this is the location of the month parameter Use the Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC RTC month value to this register 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 167 9015 Local year bcd 0 9999 R W When the local Word Option is selected for RTC source in the Edit System Parameters General settings dialog box of EasyBuilder this is the location of the year parameter Use the Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC RTC year value to this register 9016 Local day bcd 0 6 R W When the local Word Option is selected for RTC source in the Edit System Parameters General settings dialog box of EasyBuilder this is the location of the day parameter Use the Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC RTC year value to this register 9017 9019 Reserved for future use 9020 Object queue Item Number RdOnly The object queue represents the number of objects on the OIT screen which requires updating If this number exceeds 1000 then this may slow PLC communication throughout If this happens we recommend that you change the design of the window displayed 9021 9033 Reserved for future use 9034 9035 System Time unit as 0 1 seconds R W Represents a continuous revolving timer with 0 1 seconds time base 9036 9039 Reserved for futur
47. Format Options Range Description specifies number of digits to display for example 2 digits Decimal with No above Dec 1 10 displays 9 to 99 any number that cannot be displayed with n the specified number of digits is represented with asterisks ispla a No below Dec 0 10 specifies number of digits to the right of the decimal point No above Dec 1 10 specifies number of digits to the left of the decimal point No below Dec 0 10 specifies number of digits to the right of the decimal point inputiow 2147483648 to This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data PAROW 2147483647 register Decimal with a 2147483648 to This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data Do conversion Input high 2147483647 register 2147483648 to This is the lowest data value that you would like displayed on Engineering low 2147483647 the OIT F a 2147483648 to This is the highest data value that you would like displayed Engineering high 49147483647 on the OIT Hex No above Dec Not Apply NA 4 digits are used for 16 bit 8 digits for 32 bit Binary No above Dec NA 16 digits are used for 16 bit 32 digits for 32 bit Mask No above Dec 1 10 the number of asterisks to display No above Dec 1 10 specifies number of digits to the left of the decimal point Single Float No below Dec 0 10 specifies number of digits to the right of the decimal point No above Dec 1 10 specifies number of digits to the left
48. General form 4 Enter the number of the base window just created in Message board window 0 10 1999 which is located at the bottom of the General form Note 0 is used to disable the message board feature 5 Click OK 6 Use the Function Key Object Direct Window Object or Indirect Window Object to call up the message board Optional Parameters In addition to using the message board the OIT operator can change the following parameters Set the Operation Mode for the Message Board Using the Function Key Object you can program a touch screen object to change operating mode of the pen There are three operating modes e Pen select this mode when you want to write a message e Brush select this mode when you want to erase parts of a message e Clip select this mode to clip or cut out a rectangular section of a message The touch screen object can be placed onto the message board or any other window gt To create a a Message Board Operation Mode key From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears Click the General tab to display the General form Click the Message Board option Select Set operation mode from the pull down Click the Attributes button to select the operation mode you want to use Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box 7 Place the new touch screen object on the window screen ON i BS When this key is pressed it will chang
49. Printing from the Project Simulator allows more options including generic pictures of the screens To print the summary select Print Object Summary from the File menu Other options include Print Preview and Print Setup Printing project data is done from the Project Simulator 1 Start the project in the On or Off line simulator 2 Display the window to be printed 3 Right click anywhere in the window 4 To print or save a copy of the window select Print Screen or Print Screen to File To print object address information for the screen select Print Window or Print Window to File A list of active windows is displayed Select the desired window Select Image to display an image of the window or Table to display object address information 1010 1001a Rev 02 42 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Editing and Creating Screen Objects This section shows how to manipulate graphics objects that are placed onto the work area of EasyBuilder We will use examples from sample projects that are included with the EasyBuilder software HMI504T EPJ HMI520M EPJ HMIS520T EPJ HMI530T EPJ and HMISSOT EPI Please load one of these project files and have EasyBuilder ready before you begin this section We will refer to Window_12 of the project To display Window_12 on EasyBuilder perform the following steps To open a window 1 On the Window Menu click Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears 2 Click Window
50. Timer Counter P x register write the Timer Counter s device data 2 bytes each 9050 Toshiba Protocol Pe control bit RNY corresponding to the Timer Counter s register should be added If the Timer Counter s device is set to ON it should be 01 Otherwise it should be 00 9051 Roucho an Contel durng R W Set this bit to disable the touch screen when the backlight is off disabled backlight 9 i 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 165 PLC Control Object Change Set this bit to prevent the OIT from clearing the PLC regist d 9052 Window option disable clearing R W prey Ing tne rE JISE USE PLC register for the Change Window option 9053 9054 Reserved for future use If OIT loses connection to the PLC while it is trying to write to a PLC register set this bit to continue to send Write command after L f icati to PLC communications is reestablished Clearing this bit prevents the 9055 oss ot communications to FLO Raw OIT from issuing the Write command after connection is Writing to PLC register control reestablished 0 Any write to PLC command will be killed 1 Any write to PLC command will be continuously retired 9056 Loss of communications to PLC RIW If OIT loses connection to the PLC setting this bit disables the Touchscreen control touchscreen until communications is reestablished 9057 9059 Reserved for
51. Upper limit The upper range allowed Range 32768 to 32767 Sub value JOG The amount of delay after the key is held down before automatic incrementing occurs JOG delay Range 0 1 to 1 5 seconds The rate at which the automatic incrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 1 5 seconds JOG speed 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 181 JOG Decreases the value in a 16 bit PLC register by a step value each time it is pressed If the key is held down then it will continue to decrease by the step value at a predefined rate Dec value Amount of the step value Range 1 to 32767 Bottom limit The lowest range allowed Range 32768 to 32767 JOG delay The amount of delay after the key is held down before automatic decrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 1 5 seconds JOG speed The rate at which the automatic decrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 1 5 seconds Set at window open Automatically places a constant value into a PLC register when the window that the part is located in is opened Set value Constant used Range 32768 to 65535 Set at window close Automatically places a constant value into a PLC register when the window that the part is located in is closed Set value Constant used Range 32768 to 65535 Periodical JOG Continuously increases the value in a 16 bit PLC register by a step value at a predefined ra
52. Write address w Device address No of words 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Event Display part A description is not necessary but does help identify the purpose of the part 3 In the Read address frame select the 16 bit PLC register or OIT internal memory address that will be monitored by the Event Display part for the scrollable window Select BIN binary or BCD format The No of words box is set at 1 and cannot be changed 5 In the Write Address frame select the 16 bit PLC register or OIT internal memory address that will be monitored by the Event Display part for displaying a popup window Select BIN binary or BCD format This address is written to by the Event Log Object using the Write Value number when the OIT operator acknowledges the event Note You must also configure an Indirect Window Object on the same window as the Event Display Object with the same write address in order to display the popup window 1010 1001a Rev 02 Capturing Alarms and Events 233 6 The No of words box is set at 1 and cannot be changed 7 Click the Event Display tab to display the Event Display form Create Event Display Object Color Format General Event Display Display line f Text space Acknowledge Select box C Sequence no C Retum to normal time C Extended time format D H M C Event trigger date M D Character length 5 Acknowledge style
53. You may cause malfunction or permanent damage to the OIT Warning Do not power the OIT with a DC power supply used for inductive loads or for input circuitry to the programmable logic controller Severe voltage spikes caused by these devices may damage the OIT gt gt Control Panel Design Guidelines Pay careful attention to the placement of system components and associated cable routing These items can significantly enhance the performance and integrity of your control application Control panel is tied to a reliable earth ground Shielded power cable Ground strap VT TT tT TT tT E 7A HMI530 rear side OIT is grounded to control panel Shielded communication cable I O control lines Ground wires Quiet ground isolated Quiet ground Control Panel Example 1010 1001a Rev 02 Installation of OITs 9 Control Panel Grounding The control panel should be connected to a good high integrity earth ground both for safety considerations and shielding purposes Maple Systems cannot overemphasize the importance of good grounding If you fail to use good grounding procedures during installation sporadic malfunction of the OIT may occur e Connect the OIT s chassis ground terminal to a reliable earth ground with a low resistance path e Route all earth ground wires
54. a reset switch is provided on the back of the OIT to reinitialize the OIT if an operational failure occurs The Silver Series is designed for industrial environments and carries a NEMA 4 rating as well as CE compliance for noise immunity and emissions 7 The HMISOAT will operate at 12 VDC There are currently SEVEN models in the Silver Series r A Ethernet amp Model Display size Resolution LCD Type Brightness Contrast Reclpe RTC Compact pixels Module cdm2 Flash HMI504T 4 3 480 x 272 SoS 300 400 1 No No HMI520T 5 6 320 x 234 ue 500 150 1 Standard No HMI520T E a 256 color ii 5 6 320 x 234 500 150 1 Standard Yes HMI530T 7 7 640 x 480 dea 400 250 1 Standard No HMIS30TE a 256 color 1 Ci 77 640 x 480 400 250 1 Standard Yes HMI550H 10 4 640 x 480 ene 400 300 1 Standard No HMISSOHE 256 color du 10 4 640 x 480 case 400 300 1 Standard Yes Finally the Silver Series are powered by a 200 MHz Intel XScale processor making it one of the fastest OITs available on the market Even the most complicated graphics can be displayed quickly on the OIT screen In addition the OIT uses a proprietary algorithm to find the most efficient means of extracting data from the PLC This lowers the amount of bottleneck time due to the relatively slow communications baud rate of most PLCs Therefore the update rate to gather information from the PLC is very fast 1010 1001
55. address plus an indexed offset The offset is the value in address LW9000 RW a e Recipe Word 0 65535 Reserved for recipe registers Ms_RW Master Slave eserved for recipe words when using multiple s 0 65535 R d fi i ds wh i Itiple OIT Recipe Word RBI Reserved for recipes The address referred to by an RBI device is actually the specified 00 2047F address plus an indexed offset The offset is the value in address LW9000 The bit is Recipe Bit Index addressed as a hex digit placed at the end of the word address Reserved for recipe bits The RB device allows Bit level access to recipe data RB RB 00 2047F devices use same memory area as the RW devices They reference the first 10 bits of ecipe Bit eac For example Bi is Bit O in Bi is Bit 0 in is Bi Recipe Bi h RW F le Bit RBO is Bit 0 in RWO Bit R10 is Bit 0 in RW1 RB50 is Bit 0 in RW5 The bit is addressed as a hex digit placed at the end of the word address Ms_RB Pai za Reserved for recipe bits when using multiple OITs The bit is addressed as a hex digit ei 004095FE placed at the end of the word address Part of the Local Word LW9000 9999 and Local Bit LB9000 9999 registers are reserved for internal use by the OIT 1010 1001a Rev 02 164 Reserved Local Bit LB Table Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual
56. area Sets the background color of the touch indicator when an active area on the touchscreen is touched An active area is an area that contains a touchable object Frame Sets the color of the circle containing the touch indicator 1010 1001a Rev 02 64 The CPU Indicator e Attribute Enables or disables the CPU indicator e Color Sets the color of the CPU indicator The Alarm Indicator e Attribute Enables or disables the alarm indicator e Color Sets the color of the alarm indicator Security Settings Configuration Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual The Security tab is used to configure the security features in the OIT The OIT supports three levels of security The security features apply only to base windows Pop up windows or objects on the screens do not support security System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux Password Level 0 Level 2 1010 1001a Rev 02 Security Control Level 1 0 Using EZware 500 65 e Security Control Enables the OIT s security features The three password fields are not visible if the box is not checked e Password Level 0 is used to enter the numeric password for access to level 0 the lowest security Level 0 is the default security level This field is not visible if the security control box is unchecked e Password Level 1 is used to enter the numeric pas
57. by the OIT The PLC can now signal the OIT to print the screen currently displayed The OIT will send the screen contents to a printer when the PLC sets the specified PLC bit 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using a Printer with the HMI530 550 263 Using Simulation Mode Printing a window can also be done during Simulation Online amp Offline gt To Print a window 1 Place the mouse anywhere on the simulation screen 2 Right click the mouse to call up the menu 3 Select the desired menu item e Print screen preview amp save to file Prints a picture of the current screen being displayed To preview before printing select Screen Preview Print screen to a file will create a bitmap image of the screen e Print window preview amp save to file To print object address information within a window select Window printing and select the Table radio button To preview select Window pre view Print window to a file creates a bitmap image of the screen data Printing a Report You can print a report by using the PLC Control Object This feature allows you to print a report that is preconfigured in the OIT whenever directed by the PLC Using the PLC Control Object to print a report 1 From the Parts menu select PLC Control The PLC Control Object dialog box appears Click Add The PLC Control Object s Attribute dialog box appears Select Report printout for Type of control in the Attribute box Select the Device type and Dev
58. can be logical or mathematical equations Below are listed some of the different styles of statements e A declaration definition statement is constructed like the following Format Examples Explanation short This defines the name of the variable type name MyVar register and its type This defines an array name and the constant is the number of type elements in the array type name Short constant MyVars 10 e An assignment statement will transfer assign an expression to a variable The form is Format Examples Explanation MyVar MyVar 10 This assigns the result of the expression to x bY a variable variable expression e A logic or conditional statement processes a logic expression and branches depending on the result This assigns the result of the expression to a variable The ending statement End If is written as two words not one word Note that there is a difference between the conditional equality noted by two equal signs read as is equal to and the assignment equality noted by only one equal sign 1010 1001a Rev 02 254 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Format Examples If x 1 Then y y 5 Z 2z 12 Else If Condition Then y y 2 Statements z y 1 else statements End If If x 0 OR x 1 AND y 0 Then z 10 Else z 5 End If
59. enter the Meter Length Adjust the size and position of the scale in the Profile tab if necessary Click OK The Scale Object s Attribute closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with the Scale Object displayed Scale lines are most often used when creating bar graphs scale meters and trend graphs EasyBuilder allows you to create text boxes using eight font sizes 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 The text can be displayed using any of the 256 colors available in the HMI520C HMI520H HMI530C or HMI550H or the four shades available in the HMI520M and HMI550M The text can be left center or right justified in the text box gt To create a text box A 1 HA 9 19 CO 5a From the Draw menu click Text Or click the Text icon in the Draw toolbar The Create Text Object dialog box appears Select which color you want in the Color box Select the font size in the Font box Select the type of justification in Align box In the Content box enter the text that you would like to appear in the text box Click OK The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with the outline of the text box tagged to the cursor in the upper left corner of the work area Move the text box to the area you wish to place it on the window and click The text box appears with small square boxes around the perimeter Click on another area of the window to end the edit session or double click to reedit the text box parameters If yo
60. highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Set Bit Object s Attribute dialog box The Toggle Switch Object The Toggle Switch Object is used to represent the value of one PLC coil while able to write a value to the same or another PLC coil The object continuously reads one PLC coil and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the On or Off state of the coil Also the touchscreen object when pressed executes the function that was assigned to it 1010 1001a Rev 02 176 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To create a Toggle Switch Object 1 Create Toggle Switch Object E General Shape Label r Read address Device type LB From the Parts menu click Toggle Switeh Or click the Toggle Switch icon in the Partl toolbar The Create Toggle Switch Object dialog box appears Description v Device address fo M Aux Write address Device type LB y Device address fo Aux M Attribute Switch style ON y M 1 Cancel Apply Help Use the Description box to enter a title for the Toggle Switch part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part In the Read address frame select the PLC coil or OIT internal memory address that the part continuousl
61. in files that contain dimensional information about the shape Shapes are actually composed of several simpler graphics like the ones created by the drawing tools Because of this they can usually be more easily modified than bitmaps Bitmaps are pixel based graphics which are stored in files that contain information about each pixel to compose a bitmap graphic The pixel is the smallest possible detail that you can change on a screen Because of this although bitmaps are more difficult to modify they offer the most flexibility in customizing the graphic object In most cases you won t need to know the difference between a shape graphic and a bitmap graphic You will base your selection on what looks good However keep the following comparisons in mind Shapes Bitmaps Must be created using a desktop Ease of Creation Can be created using EasyBuilder grape application such as Microsoft Memory Requirements Low High Quality of picture after changing size Good Fair to Bad Time required to display on OIT screen Quick if not too complex Quick if not too large 1010 1001a Rev 02 130 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Shapes and bitmaps are used in both passive and active graphics objects Each shape or bitmap can be resized or moved just like any drawing object The following examples show how to place a pre defined shape or a bitmap on the OIT screen as a passive object Using shapes and b
62. library displayed If the project has ten libraries open you may want to close a library so that another one may be opened 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 143 gt To close or unattach an open bitmap library 1 With the Bitmap Library dialog box displayed click the pull down box of Bitmap library and choose from one of the open libraries of bitmaps Select which library you would like to close then click Unattach Lib A dialog box appears asking if you really want to unattach the selected library Click Yes The Bitmap Library dialog box reappears and the library is removed from the Bitmap library list You have the option of creating a new library This can be very useful when organizing bitmaps gt To create a new bitmap library 1 2 3 With the Bitmap Library dialog box displayed click New Lib The New Library dialog box appears Enter a name for the new library Click OK The Bitmap Library dialog box appears with the new library loaded Click Close The new library is now available to this project but it is not stored into the Library subdirectory of EasyBuilder until the project file has been saved Creating and exporting bitmaps Although EasyBuilder does not provide the ability to create bitmaps the software can import bitmaps created from some other application program This allows the ability to use a wide selection of bitmaps that can be permanently added to your bitmap libraries
63. method StrAddr Type binary or BCD of the PLC data 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 257 iAddr Off The address offset in the PLC iDataCount Number of words Precautions tips amp tricks when using Macros The size of a macro in an eob file is limited by the memory of the OIT The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes A maximum of 256 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder project A macro may cause the OIT to lock up Possible causes are A macro contains an infinite loop with no PLC communication The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro PLC communication time may cause the macro to execute slower than expected Random macro compiler errors can often be corrected by recompiling again or canceling out of the macro editor and then reopen and compile again Some macros don t work the way they should due to the declaration of some variables and how they get interpreted Some Boolean arrays work better when defined as an array of short s or int s When getting data from an external register the variable to receive it is best declared as a short or an array of short s Compiler Errors amp Error Codes When there are compile errors the error description can be referenced by the compiler error message number Error message format Macro_name Error message number Error Message n 1 Syntax error i
64. object the OIT operator can change the active fast selection window This feature allows you to customize each fast selection window created to perform a specialized function depending upon which set of windows is currently displayed For example for a group of data entry screens you may want the fast selection window to contain a numeric keypad For a group of data monitoring screens you may want the fast selection window to contain a trend graph To change the active fast selection window 1 Create a fast selection window Note To use this feature you must change the default width setting of the fast selection window from 70 to at least a minimum of 100 This is because the minimum allowable width size for base windows is 100 2 Create a base window that is the same width and height as the fast selection window you just created This will be used as another fast selection window Match all settings to that used on the fast selection window For our example we will use Window 11 3 Create a full screen base window that can be used to change the fast selection windows such as a startup window Let s use Window 10 the initial window for our example 4 On Window 10 create a Function Key object that is used to change the fast selection window From the Parts menu click Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears 5 On the General tab click JOG FS Window 6 Inthe same frame enter 11 for Window No 7 C
65. of how many alarms are active This can be used to notify the OIT operator when an alarm has occurred so that he may go to some alarm screen to get more information gt To activate the Alarm indicator 1 SA oS YS dS From the Edit menu select System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears Click the General tab to display the General form In the Task Button frame click Enable in the Attribute box Click the Indicator tab to display the Indicator form In the Alarm Indicator frame click Enable in the Attribute box Select the color you would like to use Click OK to exit the System Parameters dialog box General Settings In EasyBuilder you can configure how the task bar looks when it is activated for a more customized look From the 1010 1001a Rev 02 120 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Window menu select Open Window In the Open Window dialog box click the Task button dialog box The Window Setting box appears Window Setting Name Task Bar Window no 2 Start Pos X lo Y fo Size Width 100 Height 30 M Tracking J Monopoly M Clipping Coherence Style Window Screen Cancel The only parameters that apply to the Task Bar are the Width and Height settings The default setting for the Width parameter is 100 but you can select from a range of 10 200 The default setting for the Height parameter is 30 but you can sel
66. of the decimal point Double Float No below Dec 0 10 specifies number of digits to the right of the decimal point 1010 1001a Rev 02 8 9 General Numeric Font Click the Font tab to display the Font form Numeric Data Object s Attribute x Attribute Color a gt Align Right Adjust v Content Font fie y Help Enter the color that you want for the digits displayed in the Color box 10 Enter how you want the digits to be positioned in the Align box The choices are Representing Data with Graphics Objects 187 11 Right Adjust aligns the number to the right margin of the part Left Adjust aligns the number to the left margin of the part Leading Zero inserts leading zeroes Finally enter the size of the digits in the Font box 12 Click OK The Numeric Data Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears 13 with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can modify the attributes by double clicking on the part to display the Numeric Data Object s Attribute dialog box The Numeric Input Extend Object The Numeric Input Extend Object is used to read and write numeric values to a PLC register The object continuously reads the PLC register and displays the corresp
67. on Representing Data with Graphics Objects Using the PLC to display a base window Three objects are used by the PLC to call or display a base window The PLC Control Object is used by the PLC to display full screen windows The Direct and Indirect Window Objects are used by the PLC to display popup windows The PLC Control Object The PLC can display a full screen window by using the PLC Control Object This object allows the OIT to continuously scan a PLC register to display a full screen window which corresponds to the number in the PLC register Once the OIT displays a full screen that is requested by the PLC Control Object the OIT will automatically write the number of the requested screen to the next consecutive register For example if you assign internal data register LW10 to a PLC Control Object Change Window and the number 3 is placed into this register then the OIT will display Screen 3 Finally it will put the number 3 into LW11 This allows the PLC to confirm that the Screen has been properly displayed by the OIT You can create as many PLC Control Objects as you need each object is universal and is not dependent upon which OIT screen is currently on display 1010 1001a Rev 02 94 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To call a full screen window using the PLC Control object wl 1 From the Parts menu select PLC Control The PLC Control Object dialog box appears PLC Control Object Chang
68. only be used in For statement or While statement Continue statement takes one line of Macro e 26 Expression error e 27 Illegal operation object The mismatch of operation object in expression cause compile error For example Macro Command main int g 10 For g 2 0 To 2 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 259 g 3 4 XYZ lt illegal XYZ is undefined Next g 2 End Macro Command e 28 Missing Sub e 29 Missing Macro Command The format of function declaration is Sub Macro Command data type function name End Sub Macro_ Command Any format other than this format will cause compile error e 30 Mismatch of the number of parameters e 31 Mismatch of data type of parameter e 32 Parameter error The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to a function to avoid compile error e 33 Undefined function e 34 Illegal member of array e 35 Illegal definition of array e 36 Illegal index of array e 37 Undefined symbol Any variable or function should be declared before use e 38 Un supported PLC data address The parameter of GetData SetData should be legal PLC address e 39 Should be integer character or constant The format of array is Declaration array_name constant constant is the size of the array Usage array_namel integer character or co
69. or mounting surface is not uniform thick flat stiff or smooth enough then a sealant such as silicone may be required WARNING The OIT requires a stiff flat smooth mounting surface free of blemishes to seal properly to NEMA 4 1010 1001a Rev 02 14 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 7 Clean and deburr the panel cutout before the OIT is installed Mount the OIT to the Panel Ends of screws must not protrude from the clamp Tighten all screw clamps until they are uniformly snug it Hold the OIT against the panel until all screw clamps are in position Screw clamp locking tabs go through the slots Screw Clamp Placement Clamps Tightened Installing Screws on the OIT Position 4 screw clamps 2 each side DI CS Panel STEPS 1 Prepare the screw clamps by positioning the metal brackets at the midpoints of the screws Position the screws so that the ends don t protrude from the plastic portions 2 Set the OIT in the panel cutout and hold it in place until all clamps are in position 3 Tighten the screw clamps until all are uniformly snug CAUTION Do not over tighten the screws beyond snugness or you may damage the housing REINSTALLATION Because the gasket will take a set to the panel be sure to reinstall t
70. part by clicking once on the label This will highlight the entire object Click on the label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Set Word Object s Attribute dialog box The MultiState Switch Object The MultiState Switch Object is used to represent the value of one 16 bit PLC register while writing a 16 bit value to the same or another PLC register each time the object is pressed The object continuously reads one PLC register and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the defined states of the register The touchscreen object when pressed executes the function that was assigned to it 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 183 gt To create a MultiState Switch Object E 1 From the Parts menu click MultiState Switch Or click the MultiState Switch icon in the Partl toolbar The Create MultiState Switch Object dialog box appears Create Multistate Switch Object TA General Shape Label Description Read address Device type LW Device address BIN No of words Write address ___ _ Device type LW Device address BIN No of words Attribute Switch style JOG No of states 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the MultiState Switch part A description is not n
71. potentiometer located on the back for adjusting the level of contrast on the display It is set for optimum clarity at the factory but you can change the setting if necessary The OIT also has a black reset pushbutton and a four position DIP switch located through an access hole on the back of the enclosure The reset switch can be used to reinitialize the OIT if the OIT malfunctions Only Dip switch 1 and 2 have functionality Dip switch 1 puts the OIT into Touch Calibration mode Dip switch 2 forces the OIT into download mode and needs to be set for downloading from a Compact Flash card For normal operation all of the DIP switches should be set to the OFF position The touch screen of the OIT is fully calibrated before it leaves the factory so you shouldn t need to adjust it However with time the touch screen may need to be recalibrated gt To calibrate the touch screen 1 Connect the OIT to your computer for programming 2 From the Start menu click Programs then Maple Systems then EZware 500 then the EasyManager program 3 Click Jump To Touch Adjust The OIT screen should change to calibration mode 4 After the OIT displays a crosshair cursor you are prompted to touch the cursor for a Top left position b Top right position c Bottom left position d Bottom right position 5 The OIT screen displays two rectangular objects To determine whether the touch screen is properly calibrated place and hold your finger somewhere o
72. screens We will start with the following six screens Next create a new Fast Selection window using default settings For this example we will create six Function Key 1010 1001a Rev 02 112 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual objects that change windows Configure each Function Key object with the Change Window attribute and place the object into the Fast Selection window Finally the Task Bar must be enabled see the next section for instructions After downloading the project file to the OIT the following initial screen should be shown 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 113 Press the Fast Selection key on the Task Bar to activate the Fast Selection window dow 1010 1001a Rev 02 114 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Finally pressing the Fast Selection Key will remove the Fast Selection Window until it is needed again Base Window 14 IN As you can see the Fast Selection window though not seen is always readily available 7 The Fast Selection window can only call full screen windows not popup windows Therefore you cannot use Function Key objects with the Popup Window attribute in Fast Selection windows Changing the Fast Selection Window As with common windows only one fast selection window can be on the OIT display at one time However you can create multiple fast selection windows by using base windows Then with the help of a Function Key
73. selected You can select the No of page 1 to 31 number of pages you wish to view Select 1 if you want to view a single page only but with the hold feature enabled Hold trend display or Available if Multiple pages is selected Select Hold trend display Hold style Hold trend display amp to have the option of freezing the display Select Hold trend clear display amp clear if you want to clear the display Attribute Start from left or Start Available if Multiple pages is selected Option for where plotting from right begins Sampling time 1 to 65535 seconds Time interval between sampling and plotting of data Plot point 10 to 255 Number of times that a sampling occurs per page 1010 1001a Rev 02 Bar Graphs Meters and Trends 219 Device type PLC or OIT internal memory address Device This is the starting address that is read from to get the data to address trend Read address BIN or BCD Select binary BIN or BCD format No of channel For each channel the OIT reads another contiguous 16 bit PLC 1 to 16 register If Multiple pages is selected this 16 bit register represents the position the window is located on the multi page trend graph If Device type the value is 0 then the window is at the foremost or front of the graph For each increment of this value the window moves back Scroll control by one
74. send input 8 RTS Ready to send output 9 Not used 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 77 In Edit System Parameters Aux tab dialog set the Aux port driver Aux type and communications parameter System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux Aux type y Aux 1 F port Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Aux station lo v Aux timeout constant 0 v Aux block pack 0 y gt To set up the Aux I F port parameters Select the Aux Port driver 2 Select the hardware port to use for auxiliary communications 3 Select the Aux port communications timing parameters Set the communications parameters to match your PLC 4 Set Data bits Stop bits Baud rate and Parity These must match your PLC settings 5 Set parameters 1 6 which are dependent on the individual driver selected gt To set Aux ID and general parameters 1 Set Aux station This is used when the Aux device has a node or station identifier The OIT needs the station number to initiate communications Set as needed or leave at 0 if not used Station numbers are 0 127 use the range as appropriate for PLC type 1010 1001a Rev 02 78 Silver Serie
75. settings refer to the size of the shape or bitmap that you are using 13 You can also manipulate the position of each point along the path of movement Click on the points pull down box to select the point you wish to change then edit the X and Y positions 14 Click OK The Animation Object s Attribute form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the Animation part you just created on the screen The shape you selected is located at the first position on the path 15 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the attributes by double clicking on the part to enter the Animation Object s Attribute dialog box The next chapter shows how to construct a keypad for editing PLC data registers 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using and Creating Keypads 201 Chapter 9 Using and Creating Keypads The OIT operator must have a keypad available to enter new data when using the Numeric Input Object or the ASCII Input Object EasyBuilder includes three group libraries keypad glb user library keypad glb and user library keypad1 glb which contain sample keypads that can be placed onto a window screen You can also create your own custom keypads This chapter focuses on how to create keypads display them on the window screen and use them for entering data into PLC registers How to Create a Keypad Any keypad that you create is actually composed of keys using the Function Key Object The Function Key Object can create alphanum
76. startup window must be a full sized window Backlight saver Allows the ability to shut off the OIT s backlight The number of minutes of inactivity that the OIT will allow before the backlight is shut off can be programmed here Setting the value to 0 disables the backlight saver The backlight saver is disabled when the OIT operator touches the screen 7 When the backlight is off any touch of the OIT screen will only activate the backlight even if the operator presses an active object such as a function key Once the backlight is on then the active object will respond to additional key presses The backlight can also be activated by using the PLC Control Object For more information on this feature see PLC Control Object Cursor color Sets the color of the cursor during a data entry operation Buzzer Enables or disables the OIT s buzzer By default the OIT sounds a key clock every time the OIT operator touches the screen where an active touch screen object resides To disable the buzzer select disable on the pull down menu Pop up window Determines how a pop up window will behave when placed on a Common window e Normal The pop up window is displayed when called and any subsequent windows will be placed in front of it Above Any Others The pop up window is displayed when called and remains in front re gardless of other subsequent windows displayed Attribute Determines how the common window is drawn e Be
77. states desired Click OK The Label is now contained in the Label Library and displayed when the Library is opened View text labels for the various states of each label in the Library by selecting the State to display in the pull down box Once a label text has been created and you wish to change the number of states you may do so by double clicking on the desired label text On the Label Content Setting dialog box click the Change No of States button and then enter the No of states desired for the label 1010 1001a Rev 02 158 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Importing and Exporting the Label Library This feature allows you to save the labels from the label library into a lbl file format Once saved the file can be loaded into another project gt To save the label library 1 Click on Save Label File The open dialog box appears 2 Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data 3 Click Open gt To load the label library from an existing lbl file 1 Click Load Label File The Open dialog box appears 2 Browse for the lbl file that contains the labels 3 Click Open z The Ibl file format can not be edited The label library can also be imported and exported using a comma separated variable csv file format This format is very useful if you need to make several changes to the database When creating a new project it is easier and faster to create tags as csv files
78. status of a master OIT If a router is to be used for connecting to a different network then enter the router IP address and configure the router to address the PLC on its network See the illustration below L 192 168 10 181 S 210 16 120 179 Sub 255 255 255 0 Router 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 210 16 120 179 OIT Ethernet Router PLC Master 1010 1001a Rev 02 74 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Software Configuration In the Edit System Parameters PLC tab configure as follows System Parameter Setting PLC General indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux Task button Attribute v Position Right Background color 5 Text Left adjust Alarm bar Pixels per scroll Scroll speed 0 4 No of windows Password 0 Startup window no 10 v Back light saver lo Cursor color M E RO Grate Common window Popup window Above any others w Attribute Above base screen Extra no of event RTC source Intemal RTC Print None v C Print sequence number C Print time tag C Extended time format D H M C Print date tag C Extended date format Y M D No error detection Message board window No 0 1071999 0 You must configure the OI
79. tag library 1 Click on Save Tag File The Open dialog box appears 2 Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data 3 Click Open To load the Tag Library from an existing tgl file 1 Click on the Load Tag File The Open dialog box appears 2 Browse for the tgl file that contains the tags 3 Click Open z The tgl file format can not be edited The tag library can also be imported and exported using a comma separated variable csv file format This format is very useful if you need to make several changes to the database or if creating a new project it is easier and faster to create the tags in a csv file To export the tag library to a csv file 1 Click Export CSV The Open dialog box appears 2 Enter the name of the file where you wish to save the data 3 Click Open 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating and Using Databases and Languages 155 To import the tag library from a csv file 1 Click Import CSV The open dialog box appears 2 Brows for the CSV file containing the tags 3 Click Open Using the Tag Library Once the Tag Database has been created individual objects can use the Library to assign a Tag to the object referenced to the PLC register address 1 On addressable objects once the Tag Database has been created a Tag Checkbox is available This box is not available if no tags have been configured in the Database Library Set Bit Object s Attributes a x Genera
80. that lead from the OIT the PLC the power supply and the line filter to a central earth ground point such as a barrier strip This will ensure that no ground current from one device influences the operation of the other devices e Connect the OIT chassis ground terminal to the control panel door using a heavy gauge short braided cable or ground wire to minimize resistance e Connect the power cable s shield wire to the OIT s chassis ground terminal e Connect the control panel to earth ground using a copper grounding rod close to the OIT and control panel Hinged doors on control panels do not provide a long term electrical connection to the rest of the enclosure Corrosion develops over time and prevents good electrical contract For this reason a separate wire braid should be installed from the hinged control panel to the rest of the enclosure For a more in depth overview of ground wiring techniques refer to technical note 1027 OIT Ground Wiring and Electrical Noise Reduction which you can find on our website Connect OIT Chassis Ground to Control Panel To reduce the possibility of electrical interference connect the chassis ground terminal of the OIT to a clean earth ground Ifthe control panel is metal make sure it is properly grounded Then connect a short heavy gauge wire 18 AWG from the chassis ground terminal of the OIT to a mounting bolt on the control panel door The mounting bolt must have good electrical contact
81. that triggered the event is still true then this color is used for the event string when the OIT ge operator acknowledges or touches the string Select Box This color is used to highlight the event string that was last touched by the OIT operator Return to normal This color is used to indicate that the condition that triggered the event is no longer true 1010 1001a Rev 02 234 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 10 In the Format frame select the following attributes Attribute Description Sequence No If enabled a sequence number will be displayed along with the event string whenever an event is triggered Acknowledge time If enabled this displays the time at which an event was acknowledged Event trig time If enabled this displays the time at which an event was triggered Return to normal time If enabled this displays the time at which the condition that triggered an event is no longer true or active Extended time format D H M When enabled all times are shown as d h m Day Hour Month Short time format H M When enabled all times are shown as h m Hour Month Event Trig Date M D When enabled the date that the event was triggered is added to each event as it is displayed Month Day Extended date format Y M D When enabled all times are shown as y m d Year Month Day Using Eve 11
82. the Color box You can select a different color for each label state Enter how you want the label to be positioned in the Align box You can select a different position for each label state Finally enter the size of the label in the Font box You can select a different font for each label state Click the Tracking checkbox if you want the labels for all states to follow or track with the movement of one label when it is moved after the Word Lamp object is placed onto the window Click OK The Create Word Lamp Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label This will highlight the entire object Now click on the label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Word Lamp Object s Attribute dialog box The Set Word Object The Set Word Object is used to write a value to a PLC register The touchscreen object displays the State 0 shape until pressed When pressed it displays the State 1 shape and executes the function that was assigned to it 1010 1001a Rev 02 180 Silv
83. the Font box 7 Click OK The ASCII Data Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 8 Once the part is placed onto the window you can modify the attributes by double clicking on the part to display the ASCII Data Object s Attribute dialog box The ASCII Input Extend Object The ASCII Input Extend Object is used to enter characters into a series of PLC registers The object continuously reads the PLC registers and displays the corresponding ASCII characters in the format specified The ASCII Input Extend Object can write a maximum of 32 characters to 16 contiguous PLC registers See the ASCII Data section for information on how the ASCII characters are actually stored in the PLC registers 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 193 gt To create a ASCII Input Extend Object 1 From the Parts menu click ASCII Input Extend Or click the ASCII Input Extend icon in the Part1 toolbar The Create ASCII Input Extend Object dialog box appears Create ASCII Input Extend Object O A xs General Shape Font Description Read address Device type LW v Device address No of words Trigger address Device type LB w Device address 2 Use the Description box to enter a title f
84. the window at X 50 and Register 2 has a value of 10 the shape is placed at X 60 If Register 2 has a value of 10 the X axis only shape is placed at X 40 No of states Range 1 to 32 Input low Not used Input high Not used 1010 1001a Rev 02 196 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Reads two 16 bit registers Register 1 determines the state of the shape displayed Register 2 determines the position of the shape along the Y axis The OIT places the shape relative to the starting location For example if the shape is located on the window at Y 50 and Register 2 has a value of 10 the shape is placed at Y 60 If Register 2 has a value of 10 Y axis only the shape is placed at Y 40 No of states Range 1 to 32 Input low Not used Input high Not used Reads three 16 bit registers Register 1 determines the state of the shape displayed Register 2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis Register 3 determines the position of the shape along the Y axis The OIT places the shape relative to the starting location For example if the shape is located on the window at X 50 Y 10 and Register 2 has a value of 10 and Register 3 has a value of 5 the shape is placed at X 60 X 8 Y axis Y 15 If Register 2 10 and Register 3 5 the shape is placed at X 40 Y 5 No of states Range 1 to 32 Input low Not used Input high Not used
85. to quickly clicking the primary mouse button usually the left mouse button twice Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button usually the right mouse button once Right clicking Right click usually opens shortcut menus The following table identifies symbols and margin icons Icon Meaning gt Identifies a procedure Indicates a reference to additional information 2 Indicates an important note What You Need The following items are needed to configure and operate your OIT Configuration Software EZware 500 Configuration Cable OIT to PC Y adapter cable 7431 0098 Personal Computer2 User Provided Power Cable 6030 0009 24VDC Power Supply User Provided for details refer to Appendix A Specifications PLC User Provided Maple Systems provides Controller Information Sheets which contain important information specific Controller Information Sheet to each PLC Please locate the sheet that corresponds to your PLC on our website Communication Cable Refer to Maple Systems Tech Note 1061 for a list of available cables or build your own using the OIT to PLC cable diagrams available on our web site www maple systems com 1Allows you to connect OIT to PC using RS232 and a PLC that uses RS485 at the same time 2Computer requirements include at least a Pentium 90Mhz PC 16MB RAM 10MB available hard disk space V
86. to the control panel scrape away any paint that may be covering the panel to provide a good connection If the control panel is made of a non conductive material it is essential that you connect the chassis ground terminal of the OIT to a clean earth ground point located close to the panel Control panel connected to earth ground HMI530 rear side T 24V Tesi end 485 PLC mE 232 Area on pa nel x free of paint Stud or screw o o e o O y Oo e ee eee OIT Chassis Ground Connection 1010 1001a Rev 02 10 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Power Supply Selection The power supply used to power the OIT should provide an output of 24 VDC 5 measured at the OIT power terminal block A 24VDC regulated power supply dedicated to the OIT is required Refer to the installation guide that accopanies each OIT for input current requirements The power cable for the OIT should be 18AWG 2 conductor wire with a shield drain wire and protective shield foil or braid The shield drain wire must be connected to earth ground at both ends of the cable Please refer to the Connect the OIT to Power section for more information A power line filter installed at the AC input to the OIT power supply is highly recommended as a safeguard against conducted RF noise which is often present on factory power lines The wires connecting the output of the power line
87. toolbar 2 Click and hold down the left mouse button at the upper left corner of the graphics objects you wish to highlight For example using Window_ 12 click to the left and above of Alignment Multiple objects can be selected by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the objects you wish to select The ESC key can be used to deselect all items 3 Move the mouse cursor to the lower right comer of the highlighted objects Notice that a rectangle is formed as you do this In this example move the mouse to the right and below Make Same Size 4 Release the mouse button The rectangle outline changes to small clear square blocks around the perimeter of the objects selected If you do not completely enclose any graphics objects you wish to highlight then they will not be selected 5 When several graphics objects are selected they can easily be moved deleted or copied together Alignment hake Sane Size gt To select next object 1 This option can be used to easily select an object that is underneath another object on the screen To use this option you must first select the overlapping object 2 On the Edit Menu click Select Next Object or click on the Select Next Object icon on the Standard toolbar You can also right click on the top most object on the screen This will display a menu with a list of the overlapping objects on the bottom Then check the object that you wish to access 3 Once the o
88. vey Option E so EA RA al 2a isle 100 x LE rr ni men iaia 2 13 14 15 16 17 10 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 29 30 State toolbar Partl tool LA area polar For Help press FL Omron C Seriss and COMI xe Fan 20 Part2 toolbar mala sor clear Fi a sale HD Siate Creating a Sample Project This section walks you through the creation of an EasyBuilder project named EBPrj1 Once downloaded to the OIT this basic configuration allows the OIT to connect to the PLC display a startup screen and display a screen containing one PLC register monitor when a switch on the startup screen is pressed Although we strongly recommend that you perform the following steps to create this sample project the project is already included in your EasyBuilder software with the following filenames HMIS04T EPJ sample project for the HMI504T HMI520T EPJ sample project for the HMI520T HMI530T EPJ sample project for the HMI530 HMISSOT EPJ sample project for the HMI550H Setting the System Parameters Whenever you begin a new project you should always set the system parameters before you create any windows System parameters determine the basic operating conditions of the OIT such as what type of PLC it is connecting to 1010 1001a Rev 02 Manager toolbar 20 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To edit the System Paramet
89. will highlight the entire object Now click on the 1010 1001a Rev 02 184 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the MultiState Switch Object s Attribute dialog box The Numeric Data Object The Numeric Data Object is used to display the numeric value of a PLC register The object continuously reads the PLC register and displays the corresponding numeric data in the format specified The PLC register can be a 16 bit 32 bit or a 64 bit word gt To create a Numeric Data Object EEE 1 From the Parts menu click Numeric Data Or click the Numeric Data icon in the Part1 toolbar The Create Numeric Data Object dialog box appears Create Numeric Data Object General Numeric Font Description Read address Device type LW vw Device address o BIN w No ofwords 1 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Numeric Data part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Read address frame select the PLC register or OIT internal memory address that the part continuously reads You can select BIN binary or BCD format Select No of words that the part should read 1 16 bits 2 32 bits 4 64 bits 1010 1001
90. window for each recipe with each object on each window having a separate address This not only uses more of the OIT s resources but could also lead to configuration errors as objects are copied pasted and edited Use when it is desired to show unique information from a recipe For example it might be necessary to show one window the names of all of the recipes 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 244 For an example of how to create recipes please consult the EZware 500 online Help file O 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 245 Chapter 13 Macros Using Macros The macro language in EasyBuilder allows the programmer to perform simple transfers of data and or simple to complex conditional logic and transfers Macros are high level language programs that can run inside the OIT to perform various data transfers and can perform conditional logic They are useful for doing tasks that are not supported in a standard object or feature of the OIT The macro language combines syntax elements of C C and a little of its own style Previous experience in programming with C or C would be helpful when developing macros It is not the scope of this document to explain concepts of high level language programming and the basics such as variable data types arrays conditional logic and variable passing However it is the scope of this document to discuss the commands and comman
91. windows a Common window and a Fast Selection window Base windows are the windows that you will most often use The common window and fast selection window are two windows reserved for special functions By the end of this chapter you should be able to create these windows and use the many features available to them Opening a Window To view the contents of a window in EasyBuilder it must first be opened When you create or open an existing project file only the initial window is opened To view any other windows that have already been created you must first open the window This can be done using the Window Treebar see Chapter 3 Using EZware 500 Display Options or by performing the following To open a window 1 From the Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears 2 Click on the Window you wish to open Then click Open Note you can also open the window by double clicking the window 3 The Open Window dialog box closes and the opened window is displayed in the EasyBuilder work area 1010 1001a Rev 02 80 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Let s look at the Open Window dialog box again using the sample project open window No Window name Size Fast Selection n Common Window 320 240 __New Window 10 Initial 320 240 Settin 50 NumericKeypad 320 240 _ Setting Delete Open Close The Open Window dialog box lists all of the windows curre
92. you must save before attempting to store the next shape 10 Highlight the other shape by clicking the mouse and dragging a rectangular outline so that it covers the entire shape 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 139 11 12 13 14 15 16 Click the Save Objects to Shape Library icon in the Standard toolbar The Save to Library dialog box appears te EXIT Shape library eggs Shape No fo State No 1 Description brickegg Cancel Click the Shape library box and select the library you wish to store the shape in for this example eggs Click the Shape No pull down box to select the location 0 to store the shape Note that the State No will automatically change to state 1 the next available state Click OK The Shape Library dialog box appears with the shape stored in the library under State 1 Click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder From the File menu click Save to save the shape to the library When adding new shapes to existing libraries that come with the EZware 500 software remember that any future upgrade that you receive from Maple Systems may overwrite existing libraries during installation This will delete any new shapes that you have entered Therefore we recommend that you create new libraries to store these shapes or make backup files of the libraries before installing new upgrades Another method of adding a
93. 0 software z If you haven t already done so now would be a good time to connect the OIT to the computer and to connect the PLC that you are using to the OIT For more information consult the first part of this chapter or see Installation of OITs later on in this manual Saving your first project 1 From the File menu click Save As The Save As dialog box appears 2 Inthe File name text box type EBPrjl 3 Click Save The file is saved onto your computer hard drive and the main screen of EasyBuilder reappears Compiling your first project 1 From the Tools menu click Compile The Compiling dialog box appears 2 Click Compile EasyBuilder will compile your project and display error results 3 Tfno errors occur click Close The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears If errors have occurred repeat the steps in the Creating a Sample Project section Downloading your first project Apply power to your OIT 2 From the Tools menu click Download The EasyDownload Complete Project dialog box appears 3 Ifthe OIT is correctly connected to the computer then the download process will begin You will notice that a horizontal bar graph is displayed on the computer indicating how much of the project has been downloaded The OIT will also display several Write Flash commands that scroll on the screen If a timeout error is displayed please review your connection of the OIT to the computer and make sure that the appropriat
94. 0 starting at the 12 o clock position Full Bottom Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 360 starting at the 6 o clock position Full Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 270 starting at the 7 5 o clock position Style 2 straight arm Up half Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 180 starting at the 9 o clock position Full Up Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 360 starting at the 12 o clock position Full Bottom Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 360 starting at the 6 o clock position Full Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 270 starting at the 7 5 o clock position In the Color frame box select the color used for the arm or indicator of the meter In the Value frame box select the following Function Range Description Zero 32768 to 32766 Selects the number that represents the zero level for the meter display Span 32767 to 32767 Selects the number that represents the total span of the meter display Click OK to close the Create Meter Display Object dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the attributes of the Display Meter b
95. 1 to 14 the Alarm Bar only Display line 1 to 14 displays a single line Therefore select 1 for alarms that use the Size 16 font and select 2 for alarms that use the Size 24 font Selects how long the alarm bar is If Size 24 font is used for the alarm text string then two characters are required for each character in the text string Char length 1 to 39 4 Click OK to close the Create Alarm Bar Object dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 5 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the attributes of the Alarm Bar by double clicking on the part The Alarm Bar Object scrolls through each character of an alarm string at a predefined rate You can change the rate at which the characters scroll by doing the following To change the scrolling rate 1 From the Edit menu click System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears 2 Click the General tab The General form is displayed 3 Inthe Alarm bar frame select what type of scroll options the Alarm Bar uses Function Range Description Pixels per scroll 8 16 24 32 Selects the number of pixels that shift with each scroll Scroll speed 0 1 to 25 5 Selects the time interval between shifts in the scrolling in seconds
96. 10 1001a Rev 02 188 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 5 Click the Numeric tab to display the Numeric form Create Numeric Input Extend Object a General Numeric Shape Font Display Decimal Hex O Binary Mask O Single float Double float Raw data display Do conversion Numeric No above Dec g No below Dec 0 Input low lo Input high 9999 6 In the Display attribute box select the format type you wish to use The options are Format Range No of Words Description Decimal 32768 to 32767 1 signed 16 bit format 999999999 to 2147483647 2 signed 32 bit format Hex 0000 to FFFF 1 hexadecimal 16 bit format 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 2 hexadecimal 32 bit format Binary 00 to 11 16 bits 1 binary 16 bit format 00 to 11 32 bits 2 binary 32 bit format Mask DIRE 1 2 masks the value with asterisks Single Float RR e 2 IEEE 754 format single precision Double Float i 4 IEEE 754format double precision 7 If Decimal format is selected then you have the option of selecting Raw data display or Do conversion Use Raw data display when you wish to display the true numeric value of the register Select Do conversion when you wish to scale the value 8 Inthe Display attribute box select the format type you wish to use The options are 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 189
97. 3 ASCII Input Object using 2 194 assign Window Security Level passwords 91 Attributes changing 50 Automatic toggling feature periodical toggle 176 B background pattern 93 Bar Graphs creating 215 Base windows o o a 94 Bit Lamp Object using 172 Bitmap Libraries deleting 148 Bitmap Libraries using 144 Bitmap Object using 134 Bitmaps compressing 148 Bitmaps definition of 131 Bitmaps exporting 149 Blinking feature c oe a ea ee eaa ren 173 265 C Cable Routing and Noise Immunity 10 CE Compliance 244 62 cetudi gt ris 7 change language Li 47 change state e aaa 47 Circle tool USINB s s ao nc aose seneca 128 Clipping Feature 88 Closing projects 43 Closing windows or screens 82 Coherence Feature o o 89 Com Port sra She ea 19 Common windows above below the base screen feature si ue o a 4 SEG 107 Common windows changing 108 Common windows displaying popup windows from 0 105 Common windows using 103 Communications Settings 38 Compiling i ri o ORR AR RAW Rae a 28 compress feature 43 Connecting HMI to Computer 19 Connecting Multiple HMIs to one PLC 72 Contrast level adjusting 16 Co
98. 37 Chapter 12 Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 239 Using the Data Transfer Object 239 Using the Recipe Transfer Object 240 Creating a Recipe 243 Chapter 13 Macros 245 Using Macros o oo o oo ooooo oo 245 Macro Sample and Implementation 245 Variables Declarations and Memory Usage 24 4 2 6456 heen erro 248 Memory Usage 248 Variable Declarations 248 Variable Initialization 249 Array Initialization 249 Reserved Words 249 Operator 250 Order of Precedence 250 Main Functions and Sub functions 250 Local and Global Variables 251 Creating Variable Arrays 251 Using Macros Within Recipes 251 Using 32 bit Registers Within Macros ao os 252 Using Floating Point Registers Within MAUCTOS ooococo 253 Statements Conditions 8 Expressions 253 Function calls and passing parameters ili i 255 Reading amp Writing External Registers in a MOGGIO iaia 256 Precautions tips amp tricks when using MOCOS a soane ta es aa 257 Compiler Errors amp Error Codes 257 Chapter 14 Using a Printer With the HMI530T 550T ooooooooooo oo oooo 261 Configuring the HMI530T 550T for a Printer lt a oca aa a 261 Printing a WindoW 262 Using a Function Key 262 Using PLC Control Object 262 Using Simulation Mode
99. 7 Select a unique station number in the OIT station no box for each slave OIT and click OK Sharing Data Between the Master OIT Slave OIT and PLC Master OIT to a PLC The master OIT will be programmed just as if it were the only OIT connected to the PLC Slave OIT to a Master OIT Any local word registers LW or local bits LB located in the master OIT can be accessed read and written to write by the slave OITs Do this by using the Ms LW and Ms LB memory registers For example if the master OIT is storing data in LW10 the slave OIT can access that data by using a device type Ms_LW and device address 10 Multiple OIT is set to Master Connect I F is set to Ethernet Slave OIT to the PLC The slave OITs may access data in the PLC in two ways 1 It may write to the local words bits in the master OIT via Ms LW and Ms LB registers and those values may be transferred to the PLC by setting up a data transfer object in the master OIT program Note If the master and the slave OITs are accessing the same areas of memory in the PLC this method is more efficient because the time required to get information from the PLC is reduced 2 It may read write directly to the PLC addresses as though it were the only OIT connected to the PLC Note This method may result in inconsistent Master Slave communications Maple Systems recommends using method 1 Managing Communication Failures When communicating with multiple devices over a netw
100. 9 Click Close to close the Data Transfer Object dialog box The Data Transfer Object is active no matter what windows are currently displayed on the OIT screen Therefore you do not have to place the object onto a window screen Using the Recipe Transfer Object The Recipe Transfer Object is used to download or save data from one or more PLC registers to the OIT s internal registers that are reserved for recipes This occurs when the object is activated by a press from the OIT operator Each Object created can transfer from 1 32767 continuous registers a Recipes are not available in the HMI504T 1010 1001a Rev 02 Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 241 gt To create a Recipe Transfer Object tal 1 From the Parts menu click Recipe Transfer Or click the Recipe Transfer icon in the Part2 toolbar The Recipe Transfer Object dialog box appears Create Recipe Transfer Object General Shape Label L Description Write address Device type No of words Attribute Direction Download 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Recipe Transfer part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Write address frame select the PLC registers that are to be saved or downloaded to The No of words box is used to specify the total number of 16 bit registers used The range is 1 to 32767 The Device Address you specify for the PLC reg
101. A copy of the increment key appears in the upper left corner of the work area Deselect the increment key by clicking on any blank space in the work area 5 Double click on the second increment key The Set Word Object s Attribute dialog box appears In the General tab section change the Description to Decrement Button Click on the pull down box of the Set Style Attribute and select JOG Enter 0 in the Attribute Bottom limit box Click the Shape tab 10 Click Shape library The Shape Library dialog box appears 11 Scroll through the selections to selection 22 Click the shape then click OK The shape should appear in the Shape tab 12 Click on the Profile tab 13 Enter 105 for the X position Enter 74 for the Y position 14 Click OK 15 On the main screen of EasyBuilder you should see the decrement key that you just created move to the lower right hand side of the work area U 1010 1001a Rev 02 26 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual You have now done your part in creating this sample project It is now time for EZware 500 to do its part Finishing Up There are still a few steps which must be completed before you can test your first project In this section you will e save the project onto your computer hard drive e compile the project into a format that can be understood by the OIT e download the project to the OIT e verify that the OIT operates as expected e exit the EZware 50
102. Acknowledge Style Click Color Acknowledge Any color Color Return to Normal Any color Color Select box Any color Format Sequence No 3 Click OK Place object directly under the Alarm History text box Using the Alarm History Save and compile the project then download the project to the OIT or run the simulation mode The startup screen should display A A Alarm History li Ux Press each alarm button Note that as each alarm is activated the alarm history window displays the most recent alarm on the top of the list 1010 1001a Rev 02 238 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Since we have configured the window to be three lines only the last three alarms are seen Gino fatti fune flats frase Alarm History Pump Ma oad Tripped Pump M T i q d 2 Use the scroll buttons on the left to see the two oldest alarms at the bottom of the list Each item on the list will remain on the list permanently The alarm message will remain on the list even after the alarm condition goes back to normal The sequence number is handy since it shows the total number of alarms that have occurred in the past If you press the alarm buttons again more messages will be added to the list 1010 1001a Rev 02 Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 239 Chapter 12 Data and Recipe Transfer Objects Easybuilder includes a Data Transfer object and a Recipe Transfe
103. BCD format In the No of words box select 1 for monitoring a 16 bit register 4 Inthe No of states box select from 1 to 32 states If the actual value in the PLC register is out of range for the number of states specified then no shape or bitmap is displayed Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form Create Word Lamp Object x General Shape Label r Shape Shape library IV Use shape r Bitmap Bitmap library I Use bitmap aa aletas State Jo y DK Cancel Apply Help 6 Select either a shape or bitmap to represent the Word Lamp object If you need more information on how to do this consult Chapter 6 Creating Graphics Objects 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 179 7 Click the Label tab to display the Label form Create Word Lamp Object Label 10 11 12 13 14 15 Color mms gt Align Left v C Use label Jse Label Libra Label Library Duplicate this label to other states Click the Use Label checkbox if you want to use a label Click the Duplicate this label to other states button if you want to use the same label for all states You can have a different label for each state of the Word Lamp In the State box enter the state that you wish to edit then enter the label for that state in the Content box Do the same for the other states Enter the color that you want for the label in
104. Baud Rate 0 9600 1 192002 38400 3 576004 115200 60042 Data Bits 0 7 1 8 60043 Parity O none 1 even 2 odd 60044 Stop Bits 0 1 1 2 60045 HMI Station Address 0 255 60046 PLC Station Address 0 255 60047 Multiple HMI O none 1 master 2 slave 60048 HMI HMI link speed 0 38400 1 115200 60049 PLC time out constant 60050 PLC block pack General Settings Address Function Access Description 60051 Task button Attribute 60052 Task button Position 60053 Task button background color 60054 Task button Text 60055 Alarm bar Pixel per scroll 60056 Alarm bar Scroll speed 60057 Number of windows 60058 Reserved 60060 Startup window No This register is used to change the timer on the backlight saver 60061 Backlight saver R W mode 0 disable Backlight is on all the time 1 255 minutes before the backlight goes off 60062 Cursor color This register can change the state of the internal buzzer 60064 Buzzer Enable R W O disable buzzer from sounding 1 enable buzzer to sound when screen is touched 60065 Common window popup window 1010 1001a Rev 02 170 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 60066 Common window Attribute 60067 Extra No of Events 60068 RTC Source 60069 Printer Printer 60070 Message board window No Security Settings Address Function Access Description 0 Disables all security control passwords 60071 S
105. C register by 1 from a specified low limit at a predefined rate as long as the window that the part is located on is open When the high limit is reached the process repeats starting at the low limit again Low limit The lowest range allowed Range 32768 to 65535 Upper limit The upper range allowed Range 32768 to 65535 Break time The rate at which the automatic incrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 25 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments Step down Continuously decreases the value in a 16 bit PLC register by 1 from a specified high limit at a predefined rate as long as the window that the part is located on is open When the low limit is reached the process repeats starting at the high limit again Low limit The lowest range allowed Range 32768 to 65535 Upper limit The upper range allowed Range 32768 to 65535 Break time The rate at which the automatic decrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 25 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments Set at window maximized Automatically places a 16 bit constant value into a PLC register when the window that the part is located in is maximized Set value Constant used Range 32768 to 65535 1010 1001a Rev 02 182 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Set at window minimized Automatically places a 16 bit constant value into a PLC register when the window that the part is located in is minimized
106. CII Data Object can read up to 16 PLC registers to display a maximum of 32 characters Each 16 bit register stores two ASCII characters The first ASCII character is stored in the eight least significant bits of the register The 16 bit register that you select is the starting point for the ASCII character string The example below illustrates how an eight character string is arranged Character String ABCDEFGH Hex Value 42 41 44 43 46 45 48 47 Starting at LWO 0 1 2 3 gt To create a ASCII Data Object REL 1 From the Parts menu click ASCII Data Or click the ASCII Data icon in the Partl toolbar The Create ASCII Data Object dialog box appears Create ASCII Data Object General Font Description Read address Device type LW w Device address No of words E 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the ASCII Data part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Read address frame select the PLC register or OIT internal memory address that the part continuously reads Select No of words that the part should read 1 2 characters Range to 16 1010 1001a Rev 02 192 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 4 Click the Font tab to display the Font form Create ASCII Data Object 5 Enter the color that you want for the characters displayed in the Color box 6 Enter the size of the digits in
107. Click OK to close the Create Event Display Object dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 12 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the attributes of the Event Display by double clicking on the part nts for an Alarm History Events are a complicated feature to understand and it may be a little unclear as to how events can be used So let s go through an application example in which we will use the events feature to create and display an alarm history The alarm history shows all alarms that may have occurred in the past The Alarm objects described earlier in this chapter cannot be used to create a history since the alarm strings are removed from display once the alarm condition no longer exists But we may want to know what alarms have occurred in the past even though they no longer exist Events can be used for just such a purpose For this example we will use the same alarms that were shown in the section earlier in this chapter that described using the Alarm Display Object Therefore we will create five events which trigger from internal memory coils LBO 4 gt Create five Set Bit Objects to trigger the events 1 Open anew project with the startup screen displayed 2 Create five Set Bit Objects with the following parameters Refer to C
108. Description Direction Selects which direction the bar graph should move as it increases Up Down Right or Left If the Variable alarm feature is selected then the OIT continuously reads three 16 bit PLC registers Variable alarm instead of 1 The first register stores the current value of the bar graph The second register stores the Low alarm limit The third register stores the High alarm limit 9 Inthe Color frame box select the following Function Description Bar Selects the color for the bar graph indicator bar Background Selects the color for the background of the bar graph Frame Selects the color for the frame If you do not want a frame then select the same color as used for the i background color Alarm Selects the color used to indicate an alarm or out of range condition 10 In the Value frame box select the following Function Range Description Low alarm limit During operation if the PLC register monitored by the bar graph goes below this number the alarm color is shown for the bar graph indicator bar If you do not want to use the alarm feature then set this value equal to the Zero value If the Variable Alarm feature is enabled this box is deactivated since the Low alarm limit is derived from the second PLC register monitored 32768 to 32766 High alarm limit Like the low limit indicator if the PLC register monitored by the bar graph goes above this number the alarm color is shown for the bar graph indi
109. Display LW Y Device address Y No of words 227 Place the Alarm Display object directly underneath the Alarm Display text string and to the right of the two Set Word objects Save and compile the project then simulate off line The startup screen should appear with the following displayed atmo finti finna almas pinta Alarm Display LA Dd 1010 1001a Rev 02 228 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Press the Alm 0 Alm 1 and Alm 2 keys to activate three alarms As each alarm is activated it is immediately displayed in the Alarm Display scrollable window The most recent alarm is always displayed at the top of the list Notice that all three alarms can be seen in the scrollable window since we configured the Alarm Display object with a scrollable window of three lines finnoj finti farmt2 Almas punta Alarm Display g Water Level Lou Now press the Alm 3 and Alm 4 keys to activate those alarms Since the scrollable window is configured for three lines two of the alarms on the list cannot be seen Finto ainni finna finna pinna Alarm Display Pump Motor Overload Tripped Pump Motor Fault Dd To see the other alarms you can press the Down Arrow key This will increment the value in LWO which is used by the Alarm Display object to determine what part of the alarm list to show with the scrollable windo
110. Else next Then Break End not To Binaux False Or True Binplc float return void Case For select wend char GetData SetData While Continue If short xor 1010 1001a Rev 02 250 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Operator Below is a list of the recognized operators Group Name Sym Assignment Assignment operator Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Modulo Comparison operators Less than lt Less than or equal to lt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to gt Is equal to Not equal to lt gt Logic operators Conditional AND AND Conditional OR OR Exclusive OR XOR Boolean NOT NOT Bitwise and shift operators Left shift lt lt Right shift gt gt Bitwise AND amp Bitwise OR Bitwise XOR A Bitwise complement Order of Precedence The process order of many operators within an expression is called the order of precedence Priority of the same kind of operator From left to right from top to bottom Arithmetic operator A Bitwise amp Shift operators From left to right within the expression Comparison operator From left to right within the expression Logic operator Not And Or Xor e Arithmetic operator is higher priority than a Bitwise operator e Bitwise operator is higher priority than a Comparison operator e Logic operato
111. Enter the size of the digits in the Font box 10 Click OK The ASCII Input Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 11 Once the part is placed onto the window you can modify the attributes by double clicking on the part to display the ASCII Input Extend Object s Attribute dialog box You may also resize the object by single clicking on the object and pulling the border of the object to the appropriate size The object s associated text may be repositioned by clicking on the object and then by dragging the text to it s new position The Moving Shape Object The Moving Shape Object performs three functions depending upon the values in three consecutive PLC registers e Similar to the Word Lamp Object the Moving Shape object continuously reads a PLC register and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the number of states defined e the Moving Shape object continuously reads a second PLC register to determine where along an x axis to display the shape or bitmap e the Moving Shape object continuously reads a third PLC register to determine where along a y axis to display the shape or bitmap This feature allows you to create a shape or bitmap on a screen that can change the way it looks as well as where it is located on the OIT scre
112. GA video controller Microsoft Windows 95 98 2000 or NT and one available RS 232 serial port 312 24 VDC power supply needed for the HMI504T OIT Basics Operator Interface Terminals OITs provide much more versatility than traditional mechanical control panels An OIT allows a plant floor operator to monitor current conditions of a control system and if necessary to initiate a change in the operation of the system OITs connect to programmable logic controllers PLCs typically through the PLC s serial communications port The OIT can be programmed to monitor and or change current values stored in the data memory of the PLC OITs can have either text based or graphics based displays A text based OIT can display printable text characters but no graphics Some text based OITs can display text characters in various sizes A graphics based OIT can display printable text 1010 1001a Rev 02 Introduction 3 characters of varying fonts and sizes and graphics shapes such as icons bitmaps or pictures Using pictures instead of words or characters often greatly simplifies the operation of the OIT making the OIT much more intuitive to use Some OITs use touch screen displays while others use a membrane style keypad Membrane style keyboards are best used in applications in which the keypad is likely to become dirty Touch screen displays are placed over the OIT screen thus providing much more flexibility than typical membrane style keypads Be
113. JV Uselabel ST UseLabelLibray ST Tracking Label Library Duplicate this label to other states Cancel Apply Help 10 11 12 13 14 15 Click the Use label checkbox if you want to use a label Click the Duplicate this label to other states button if you want to use the same label for all states You can have a different label for each state of the Bit Lamp In the State box enter the state that you wish to edit then enter the label for that state in the Content box Do the same for other states Enter the color that you want for the label in the Color box You can select a different color for each label state Enter how you want the label to be positioned in the Align box You can select a different position for each label state Enter the size of the label in the Font box You can select a different font for each label state Click the Tracking checkbox if you want the labels for all states to follow or track with the movement of one label when it is moved after the Bit Lamp object is placed onto the window Click OK The Create Bit Lamp Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location of the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label
114. RS232 communications This means that you can have a maximum of 50 feet distance between OITs Also because connection uses a daisy chain method if 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 71 one of the OITs loses power all other OITs further down the chain will be unable to communicate to the PLC The OITs are wired together in the following fashion Master Slave 1 Slave 2 HMI500 HMI500 HMI500 ine rs 233 1 i E n E i PC PLC PC 1 PC i PLC RS 485 RS 23311 RS 232 RS 232 i RS oa RS 232 DESS DE9PIDE9S DE9P DE9S DE9P DE9S op DE9P w j ja fa un je lu j Software Connection You must configure the OIT that connects to the PLC as the master All other OITs should be configured as slave OITs To configure the Master OIT 1 2 3 Click the Edit menu on the main screen of EasyBuilder At the bottom of the menu click System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears The dialog box has three tabs PLC General and Indicator Select the PLC tab Select Master from the Multiple OIT box Select either 38400 or 115200 for the HMI HMI link speed Make sure this setting matches the settings for the slave OITs Select a unique station number in the OIT station no box Click OK to save the System Parameters settings and return to the main screen of EasyBuilder To configure the Slave OIT 1 2 3 Click the Edit menu on the main screen of EasyBuild
115. Save a project compile a project and download the project to the OIT e Verify that the OIT is functioning properly Before You Begin Before you install EZware 500 make sure your computer meets the following minimum system requirements e Pentium based 90MHz or higher processor e 16 MB of RAM more memory improves performance e 10 MB available hard disk space e VGA or higher resolution monitor set for 256 color 800x600 pixel mode e Microsoft Mouse or compatible pointing device e One available RS 232 port e Microsoft Windows 95 98 NT XP or higher Connecting OIT to Computer Before you start your first project the OIT should be connected to the computer so that the project can be downloaded after creating it You should also connect the PLC that you are using to the OIT so that you can test the operation of the OIT after you have finished creating this sample project gt To connect your OIT to the computer 1 Connect a 24VDC power supply to the OIT 2 Connect the Y adapter programming cable Maple P N 7431 0098 to the computer and OIT e Connect the end marked OIT to the OIT port labeled PC RS 232 e Connect the end marked PC to the COM port of the computer Apply power to the OIT Changing the PC COM Port used by EZware 500 EZware 500 is initially configured to use Com Port 2 In Windows click the Start button Select Programs Select EZware500 Select EasyManager In the top left drop down list box selec
116. Select baud rate parity data bits and stop bits Use Maple Systems Controller Information Sheets or the PLC manufacturer s operations manual for information on the communications parameters required by the PLC These parameters have to match the PLC settings Parameter and 2 are used to configure a delay time for the OIT The time set on these parameters is the time the OIT will wait before sending another request for information Parameter 1 is used in the Protocol level and Parameter 2 is used at the Operating System level Refer to the Controller Information Sheets if these parameters are required Parameters 3 6 are not used Set the OIT Station No used by some protocols that require the OIT to have a unique network address Consult your Controller Information Sheets for information on the protocols to which this parameter applies Set the PLC Station Number or Node Address of the PLC with which the OIT will communicate Multiple HMI and HMI HMI link speed Used when connecting multiple OITs to a single PLC Disable this setting if you are connecting only a single OIT to a PLC For more information on connecting multiple OITs see Connecting Multiple OITs to one PLC at the end of this chapter Connect I F Allows selection of the method by which multiple OITs can be daisy chained The options are Serial or Ethernet If Ethernet is selected configure the Local and the Server IP addresses For more information see Connecting Multiple OITs Usi
117. T that connects to the PLC as the master All other OITs should be configured as slave OITs unless an Ethernet switch is used in which case the OITs may all be masters with separate local IP addresses and all have the same Server PLC address To configure Master OITs to talk with a PLC over the Ethernet port Click on Edit System Parameters and select the PLC tab Select PLC Type as Modbus RTU TCP IP Select PLC I F port as Ethernet For the multiple OIT box select Disable if there are no slave OITs Select Master if any OIT is to be a slave unit and if so select Ethernet for Connect I F 5 Select a unique IP Address in the Local IP Address boxes PG a 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 75 6 Enter in the ZP Address for the PLC in the Server IP Address boxes Note Whatever the network addresses are the numbers octets in the first three boxes must match for the Local IP and the Server IP 7 Enter 255 255 255 0 for the Subnetwork Mask 8 Ifthere is a router that will be between the OIT and the PLC enter the router IP address in the Default Route IP address section To configure the Slave OIT if there is an Ethernet connected Slave OIT Unit 1 Click Edit System parameters and select the PLC tab 2 Select PLC Type as Modbus RTU TCP IP 3 Select PLC I F port as Ethernet 4 For the Multiple OIT box select Enable 5 Select Slave from the Multiple OIT box 6 Select Ethernet for the Connect I F
118. W 9000 If indirect addressing is used then the direct recipe address is determined by adding the value contained in LW 9000 to the address of the RWI register For instance to indirectly point to the direct recipe address RW 20 an example would be that the macro would store the value 15 into the 1010 1001a Rev 02 252 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual LW 9000 pointer and then use an RWI address 5 RWI 5 to GetData or SetData LW 9000 15 RWI 5 gt RW 20 The pointer has a maximum limitation of 32767 so LW 9000 can indirectly address from an offset of 0 to 32767 To indirectly address recipe registers above 32767 you will need to have the RWI address set to a higher address The macro code on the next page will clear all general use recipe memory area Because of the pointer s limitation max of LW 9000 32767 it breaks up the incrementing of memory into two sections the lower half 0 to 29999 and upper half 30000 to 59999 Macro clear memory routine Macro Command main int Address 0 short Initial 0 short Done 0 short Section 0 LW 2 is used as an indicator in the project SetData Section LW Binplc 2 1 LW 2 0 Lower Half For Address 0 To 29999 SetData Address LW Binplc 9000 1 LW 9000 incr through memory SetData Initial RWI_Binplc 0 1 RWI 0 indirect address is Low Next Address Section 1 SetData Section LW Binplc 2 1 1W 2
119. _12 3 Click Open Window_12 appears in the work area of EasyBuilder Alignment Nake Same Size Display Options Before we begin describing some of the commands that can be used to edit graphics objects there are a few commands that apply to the general work area of EasyBuilder EasyBuilder provides a Window No Treebar window that can be used to easily maneuver between windows of a project It also allows you to select any object that is on the window that is currently displayed To display hide the Window No Treebar 1 On the View Menu click Window No Treebar gt Using the Window Treebar to display window screens 3 Windows 1 The Window Treebar combines into a single tree a list of all of the windows in a project and 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 43 all of the objects on each window Using the 520CDEMO EPJ project the following should be seen Windows 4 Fast Selection 6 Common Window 11 Trends 12 Bar Graphs 13 Meter Displays Event Display 15 Alarm Display 16 Numeric Entry 17 Graphics 18 ASCII Entry 19 Animation 20 Data Transfer 21 Pop Up Windows 22 Recipe 23 RecipeSave 24 RTC 25 26 27 Be 6 Be I Ge Ee Ee EE Ee 2 Notice that the tree displays the title for each window next to the window number This makes it easy to determine windows have been created for a project The asterisk next to Window 10 indicates that this window is currently
120. a Rev 02 Introduction List of Features The next chapter will guide you through the creation of your first project Before you proceed you may wish to read this brief list of some of the features offered in the Silver Series OIT Icon Name Description E Bit Lamp Creates a graphics object to reflect the current status of a PLC bit E Word Lamp Creates a graphics object to reflect the current state of a multi state PLC data register HHH Creates a touch screen graphics object that represents a two state switch When pressed it l Set Bit sets resets a PLC bit led Set Word Creates a touch screen graphics object that represents a multi state switch When pressed it can place a constant value in a PLC register or jog the value Toggle Switch Creates a touch screen graphics object that represents a two state switch changing state picture based upon a PLC bit When pressed it can control another PLC bit Multi State Switch Creates a multi state touch screen graphics object that changes state picture according to the value in a PLC data register When pressed it sends a value s to another PLC register Function Key Creates a touch screen graphics object which displays a window or edits a PLC register Numeric Input Displays a number stored in a PLC register The number can be changed using a numeric keypad Numeric Data Displays a number stored in a PLC register ASCII Input D
121. a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 185 4 Click the Numeric tab to display the Numeric form Create Numeric Data Object 5 Inthe Display attribute box select the format type you wish to use The options are Format Range No of words Description 32768 to 32767 1 signed 16 bit format Decimal 999999999 to 2147483647 2 signed 32 bit format 0000 to FFFF 1 hexadecimal 16 bit format ex 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 2 hexadecimal 32 bit format 00 to 11 16 bits 1 binary 16 bit format Binary 00 to 11 32 bits 2 binary 32 bit format Mask SELE 1 2 masks the value with asterisks 999999999 9999999999 to oe ni Single Float 9999999999 9999999999 2 EEE 754 format single precision 999999999 9999999999 to Dai Double Float 9999999999 9999999999 4 IEEE 754 format double precision 6 If Decimal format is selected then you have the option of selecting Raw data display or Do conversion Use Raw data display when you wish to display the true numeric value of the register Select Do conversion when you wish to scale the value 1010 1001a Rev 02 186 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 7 Inthe Numeric attribute box select how you want the data to be represented The Input low and Input high boxes don t apply unless Decimal format with Do conversion is selected The options are
122. a Rev 02 Creating Windows 107 windows may require a common alarm message By changing the common window with each series of windows you can customize each common window to contain only the graphics objects that are needed gt To change the active common window 1 Za Create a common window Create a base window that is full screen This will be used as another common window Note that when a base window is used as a common window the Start Pos Style Frame and Background settings are ignored by the OIT For this example let s use Window 30 as the alternate common window Create another full screen base window that can be displayed along with the common windows such as a startup window Let s use Window 10 the initial window for our example On Window 10 create a Function Key object that is used to change the common window From the Parts menu click Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears On the General tab click Change Common Window In the same frame enter 30 for Window No Click the Shape tab Click Use Shape Click on the Shape Library command Select Shape 0 from the button1 library Click OK to return to the Create Function Key Object dialog box Click the Label tab Click the Use label checkbox For our example type CCW meaning Change Common Window into the Contents box Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box and go back to the EasyBuilder main screen
123. al For more information on how to use the Numeric Input Extend Object consult Chapter 8 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 8 Create an ASCII Input Object Extend with the following parameters Tab Frame Parameter Value Description ASCII Input Register Device type LW Device address 1 Read Address BCD or BIN BIN General No of words 12 Device type LB Trigger address Device address 9000 Attribute Adjust Left Use Shape checked Shape Shape Shape library button1 item 0 Color Black Font Attribute Align Right Adjust Font 16 For more information on how to use the ASCII Input Extend Object consult Chapter 8 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 9 Create two text boxes one to identify the Numeric Input register and one to label the ASCII Input register gt Editing data registers using a keypad Save and compile the new project then test the operation of the keypad by either running in li Simulation mode or by downloading the project to the OIT 2 The following screen should appear Numeric Input Object ENE Ed Ce fafefc ole rie wit o xe n Jo e o r s r u o u a r a eee e Jcteor Jenten 3 Change the value of the Numeric Input register Touch the Numeric Input Object to activate the edit mode This should cause the 0 digit to start blinking 4 Using the keypad enter digits 1
124. al tab to display the General form In the Task Button frame click Enable in the Attribute box Click the Indicator tab to display the Indicator form In the Touch Indicator frame click Enable in the Attribute box Select which colors you would like to use for the Non Configured Area the Inactive Area the Active Area and the Frame box 7 Click OK to exit the System Parameters dialog box The CPU Indicator This optional feature reflects the status of the OIT s microprocessor As the color indicator grows the microprocessor of the OIT is processing more data The CPU indicator could be used as a rough indicator of how much activity is occurring in the OIT Aap YD gt To activate the CPU indicator 1 From the Edit menu select System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears Click the General tab to display the General form In the Task Button frame click Enable in the Attribute box Click the Indicator tab to display the Indicator form In the CPU Indicator frame click Enable in the Attribute box Select the color you would like to use Click OK to exit the System Parameters dialog box SS Oi O 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 119 The Alarm Indicator a This optional feature reflects the status of alarms The color indicator grows every time a new alarm condition becomes active The color indicator is full when ten alarms are active The Alarm indicator can be used as a rough indication
125. alog box appears In the Frame section click the pull down arrow of the Color box and select a color Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box Click on the line thickness that you want to use Creating Graphic Objects 127 4 Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are currently editing The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor 5 Click to mark a corner of the arc Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the arc should be Click the mouse cursor again to mark the arc The arc object is formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the perimeter of the are 6 To continue creating more arcs repeat the last step To move the arc click on the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar Move the arc to the preferred location 7 To change any of the attributes double click on the arc to display the Are Object s Attribute dialog box The Polygon Tool The polygon tool is used to create polygons Each polygon created has four parameters associated with it size thickness color and filled gt To create a polygon 1 From the Draw menu click Polygon Or click the Polygon icon in the Draw toolbar The Attributes dialog box appears 2 Ifthe interior of the polygon is to be filled with a color check the Filled box Two additional settings appear 3 Ifyo
126. aracter or number a z A Z 0 9 or _ and can be as many characters as you need to describe it the compiler has been tested to variable name lengths of 32 characters but it is best to keep the variable names small for ease of reading the code Variable names are not case sensitive so result is the same as ReSult or RESULT Variable names must always start with a letter i e variables cannot begin with a number or the underscore _ character Memory Usage Macros use a minimum of about 2 5K plus the memory required for each variable type e float 4 bytes 32 bits e int 4 bytes 32 bits e short 2 bytes 16 bits e char 1 byte 8 bits e bool 1 bit e arrays the corresponding number of bytes for each element plus another 2 bytes for the index Macros use memory from the background task defined as Window 0 area There is a default memory size of 320K available for macros only 220K is allotted if the Fast Selection task bar is enabled and the there are other background task objects that also use memory in this area such as e Trends e XY Plots Data Transfers e Alarms e Events e PLC Controls e Printer functions If the application exceeds the 320k limit both the simulator and the OIT will display a System Severe Error message To check the memory usage right click on the Simulator window and select System Resource from the menu To add more memory to this area reduce th
127. arms Select 3 for variable alarms Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form Bar Graph Object s Attributes i x General Shape Bar Graph Profile r Shape Shape library I Use shape M Use bitmap Of 1 2 3 4 8 swe fos r Bitmap OK Cancel Apply Help 1010 1001a Rev 02 6 A shape or bitmap is not necessary if you plan to display the bar graph as a rectangular object If you do select a shape the bar graph will only show in areas of the shape in which no color has been selected i e inside an unfilled rectangle object If you select a bitmap the bar graph will only show in the area of the bitmap tagged as transparent for example try using the flow tank bitmaps in the PIPLINE library items 16 37 If you need more information on how to use bitmaps and shapes consult Chapter 6 Creating Graphics Objects Bar Graphs Meters and Trends 7 215 Click the Bar Graph tab to display the Bar Graph form Bar Graph Object s Attribute x General Shape Bar Graph Profile Attribute Direction Un v Variable alarm No v A Color Bar rms Background Frame MOM Alarm II Value Low alarm limit 25 High alarm limit 75 Zero fo Span 100 Cancel pp Help 8 Inthe Attribute frame select what type of Bar Graph to use Function
128. asons e Object ID tags are required by EasyBuilder to differentiate each object created e Ifan error occurs during the compile process EasyBuilder can refer to the window and object ID to indicate the object that is causing problems gt To enable disable Object ID tags 1 On the Option Menu click Window Property The Window Property dialog box appears 2 Click the Display Object ID checkbox to display tags 3 Click OK If you enable the Grid on the work area you may also take advantage of a useful feature called Snap The Snap option causes all objects placed into the work area to fall along the boundaries set by the grid lines The Snap option can help provide a more ordered appearance to graphics objects at 1 The Grid option must be enabled 2 On the Option Menu click Grid Snap The Grid Snap Settings dialog box appears 3 Click the Snap checkbox 4 Click OK gt To use the snap option Finally you will find that you can move objects by selecting them with the mouse cursor and dragging them to a new location However you may find it difficult to select an object without accidentally moving it just a little At times this may be frustrating so you may want to disable the move feature using the mouse and only move an object by changing it s X and Y position parameters in the Profile tab of the object s attributes box This is the intent of the Fix Objects feature gt To enable the fix objects command 1 On th
129. asswords to the three levels of security access 2 Assign a security level to each of the window screens 3 Create a Numeric Input Object that allows you to change the current access level To assign Window Security Level passwords 1 From the Edit menu select System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears Click the Security tab to display the Security form To enable the Window Security Level feature check the Security Control box The Password frame box appears showing the current passwords for the three security levels Each password can have a value of 0 indicating no password is assigned to that level or 1 to 4 294 967 295 After entering a password for each level click OK to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder YB 2 These passwords must be entered by the OIT operator to gain access to any window screens that are assigned a security level To assign a security level to window screens 1 All window screens are initially configured with the lowest level security access allowing total accessibility To change the level of access you must change the window screen s security level in the window settings dialog box 2 From the Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears 3 Click on the window you wish to modify and then click the Setting command button The Window Setting dialog box appears 1010 1001a Rev 02 90 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 4 In
130. at high frequency or high current levels with a grounded metal shield 1010 1001a Rev 02 Installation of OITs 11 Installation It is necessary to follow all installation procedures described in this chapter for electrical noise immunity and CE compliance Your Maple Systems OIT is designed to connect easily to your PLC External rear connectors provide quick connections for power communications and programming wiring There are two serial ports on the rear of the OIT except the HMI504T which has one serial port Both of these are D subminiature 9 pin connectors Use the female connector for RS 232 communications to a PLC Use the male connector for RS 485 communication to a PLC and RS 232 communications to a PC Use the supplied separate 3 position terminal block to provide power to the OIT Connect the OIT to Power The power cable for the OIT should be 18AWG 2 conductor wire with a shield drain wire and protective shield foil You may buy cable P N 6030 0009 by the foot from Maple Systems to make these Always run the DC ground wire directly back to the signal return of the power supply Do not use the chassis ground wire as your signal return Maple Systems recommends using an axial ferrite coil Maple p n 2531 0001 with each HMI550 OIT to further reduce the electrical interference that may be conducted on the power lines Thread the positive and negative wires of the power cable through the ferrite coil so that the coil is no mo
131. ation Manual For example suppose that you have a full screen that calls up Popup Window 13 If the full screen calls a popup window with coherence disabled it displays on the OIT screen over any other popup windows that might occupy the same area In this example the full screen calls up Popup Window 12 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 89 However if Popup Window 12 had the coherence feature enabled a different picture would have occurred Although Popup Window 12 was displayed after Popup Window 13 it appears behind it Even if the OIT operator activates Window 12 by touching some object on that window it will remain behind all other popup windows displayed 7 If two popup windows are displaved with the coherence feature enabled on both then the popup window that is displayed first will be the dominant window Coherence is most often used on popup windows that take a large area of the OIT display When they are displayed they often completely cover smaller popup windows that are already on display making it difficult to access the covered popup windows Setting the Window Security Level EasyBuilder provides the ability to restrict access to window screens so that only authorized personnel can view them Three security levels are available Level 0 Lowest Level 1 Middle and Level 2 Highest You must perform the following three steps to use the Window Security Level feature 1 Assign p
132. ave As dialog box appears 3 Enter a file name and then click Save 4 The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears gt To savea project using the compress feature The compress feature allows you to save a project in compressed format so that the project data takes less space on your hard drive This utility also will save the graphics libraries associated with the project into the project file This facilitates sending a copy of the project to another person who has EZware in order to download the project into an OIT 1 From the Tools menu select Compress Uncompress The Compressing dialog box appears 2 Inthe Compress frame box under Source Name select the project epj file that you wish to compress File must have a cmp extension 3 Click Compressing to begin The utility will compress the project file and all related graphics libraries into a single file gt To extract a compressed project file 1 From the Tools menu select Compress Uncompress The Compressing dialog box appears 2 Inthe Uncompress frame box under Source Name select the project cmp file that you wish to uncompress 3 Click Uncompressing to begin The utility will extract the project file and all graphics libraries from the cmp file gt To exit EasyBuilder On the File Menu click Exit or click on the standard windows Close icon in the upper right corner Printing Projects A text based project summary can be printed from within EasyBuilder
133. ay the Plot Display form Create XY Plot Object a General Plot Description Channel Pen attribute Color Value H Zero 1 H Span 2 4 Use the Description box to enter a title for the XY Plot part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 5 In the Channel pull down box select each channel to modify the attributes for the channel The XY Plot only supports channel 0 Function Range Description Color Selects the color used for that channel H Zero 1 to 32767 The value at which the plot will reach the left side of the Horizontal Axis 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 222 H Span 1 to 32767 The value at which the plot will reach the right side of the Horizontal Axis V Zero 1 to 32767 The value at which the plot will reach the bottom of the Vertical Axis V Span 1 to 32767 The value at which the plot will reach the top of the Vertical Axis 6 Click OK to close the Create XY Plot Object dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location You may want to create a Rectangle Object that is displayed behind the XY Plot if the XY Plot is shown in a window screen with other objects 7 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the a
134. b New Lib Place Unattach Lib Delete 3 Click on the Library Name pull down box to select the keypad library Click on part 5 and then click Place The Group Library dialog box closes and the keypad is placed onto the upper left corner of the work area of EasyBuilder 5 Click on the part to move it to the lower half of the window screen 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using and Creating Keypads 6 From the Part menu select Numeric Input Extend The Create Numeric Extend Object dialog box appears Create Numeric Input Extend Object General Numeric Shape Font Description Read address Device type LW v Device address BIN v No of words Trigger address Device type LB y Device address 7 Create a Numeric Input Object with the following parameters 205 Tab Frame Parameter Value Description Numeric Input Register Device type LW Device address 0 Read Address General BCD or BIN BIN No of words 1 Device type LB Trigger address Device address 9000 Format Decimal Display Type Raw data display Numeric No above Dec 5 Numeric Input low 32768 Input high 32767 Use Shape checked Shape Shape library button1 item 0 Shape Color black Attribute Align Right Adjust Font 16 1010 1001a Rev 02 206 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manu
135. base of register addresses with each tag representing a single address The Tag listing does not contain display information as display attributes are set when the individual object using the Tag listing is created gt To create a Tag Database Library Tag 1 From the Library menu click Tag or click the Call Up Tag Library icon from the Standard toolbar The Tag Library dialog box appears Madiby Save Tag File Load Tag File Export CSV nl 1010 1001a Rev 02 154 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 2 To create a new Tag listing click the Add button to display the Tag dialog Tag Name UA Address Type Bit Device Type LB Address fo cane Enter the new Tag name Tag names may be up to 100 characters any character Enter the Address type Bit or Word Enter the Device type Enter the Register Address Make additional entries to the Database by repeating the procedure Aa Pi pa gt To delete a tag 1 Open the Tag Library as directed above 2 Select the tag to delete 3 Click the Delete button To modify a tag 1 Open the Tag Library as directed above 2 Select the tag to edit 3 Click the Modify button 4 Edit as applicable and then click OK Importing and Exporting the Tag Library This feature allows tags from the tag library to be saved into a tgl file format Once saved the file can be loaded into another project gt To save the
136. bject you are trying to access is selected you can proceed to modify its attributes or delete it gt To select all objects 1 On the Edit Menu click Select All Objects 2 Small clear square blocks appear around the perimeter of all the objects on the window 3 You can now easily move delete or copy the entire window screen to a new window Using the Undo 2 and Redo commands 1 The Undo command is used to cancel the last command or action that you made For example select the Alignment text box in Window_12 2 Press the Delete key on your keyboard to delete the text box 3 From the Edit menu click Undo or click the Undo icon from the Standard toolbar You can also press CTRL Z The deleted text box reappears 4 The Redo command is used to cancel the Undo command For example if you decided that you really did want the Alignment text box deleted click the Redo command 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 47 Using the Cut de Copy Es and Paste ia commands 1 These commands are all selected from the Edit menu or by clicking the appropriate icon in the Standard toolbar 2 Select the graphics object or objects you wish to cut or copy 3 Click Cut to copy and remove the graphics object s from the work area or click Copy to copy the graphics object s Using Window_12 select the scale meter and then press CTRL X to cut the object from the work area 4 Objects cut or copied from one window can be pasted i
137. box appears Alarm Scan Object Address Alarm Content Add Close 1010 1001a Rev 02 224 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 2 Click the Add button The Alarm Scan Object s Attributes dialog box appears Alarm Scan Object s Attributes Read address Device type is v Device address 0 Aux Attribute Alarm On Off Category 0 Content Color a Font 16 v Use label library Label Library 3 Inthe Read address frame select the PLC coil to monitor the alarm condition 4 Inthe Attribute frame for the Alarm setting click On or Off Use the On setting to activate the alarm condition when the PLC coil is set Use the Off setting to activate the alarm condition when the PLC coil is clear The Category setting is reserved for later use 5 Inthe Text frame enter a text string in the Condition text box that is to be displayed when an alarm condition occurs 6 Select the color of the text string in the Color box 7 Select the font size of the text string in the Font box Sizes 16 and 24 are available 8 Check the Use label library box if you would like to use the database of text labels Click the Label Library box to create a new label if necessary For more information about how to use the Label Library consult Chapter 7 Creating and Using Databases and Languages 9 Click OK to close the Alarm Scan Object s Att
138. cator bar If you do not want to use the alarm feature then set this value to the Zero value plus the Span value If the Variable Alarm feature is enabled this box is deactivated since the High alarm limit is derived from the second PLC register monitored 32767 to 32767 Zero 32768 to 32766 Selects the number that represents the zero level for the bar graph 1010 1001a Rev 02 216 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Span 32767 to 32767 Selects the number that represents the total span of the bar graph 11 Click OK to close the Create Bar Graph Object dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 12 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the attributes of the Bar Graph by double clicking on the part Creating Display Meters The Display Meter Object is used to represent the data in a 16 bit PLC register as a scaled meter You can configure the Display Meter in four styles Up Half The Display Meter can be configured with any base number that represents 0 level and any span range The Display Meter object is most often used with the Scale Object and a shape in the background such as a Rectangle Object gt To create a Display Meter Object Ti 1 From
139. cause of this switches can be created on a touch screen that appear only when needed The Maple Systems Silver Series OITs are graphics based touch screen OITs Before we get any further into the operation of these OITs it is necessary to define some terms that will be used throughout this manual Projects The OIT has two basic segments of internal memory The code memory contains the information required by the OIT that controls how it operates such as the features supported and how it communicates to a PLC The OIT programmer does not have the ability to change code memory The project memory pertains to all of the window screens created and any other features that the OIT programmer can create using the EZware 500 configuration software Therefore the term project is used to designate the file that is sent to the OIT from the EZware 500 software Objects An object is any action that the OIT performs while it is communicating to the PLC In order to get the operator interface terminal to do anything you must program the OIT with objects Objects perform actions such as display text or graphics write a value to a PLC register or display an alarm Objects most often are graphics shapes that are to be displayed on the OIT screen For example a Text Object is used to display text on the OIT But objects are also used to configure the OIT to perform some action For example a PLC Control Object tells the OIT to continuously monitor a PLC re
140. ce the cursor after the declarations and then press the PlcCom button This way all variables will be available in a drop down menu list within the PlcCom dialogHIDD MACROPLCCOM GetData Function This function reads data from a register location in the OIT or PLC memory and stores it into a variable The format for the GetData function is GetData DestVariable Addr Tpe Address NumElements Parameter Description Example s i The name of the variable to store the DestVariable data that is captured MyVar InputArray 0 Addr Type The device type and encoding method LW Binplc 4x Binplc gt YP binary or BCD of the PLC data Ox Binaux RW Bcdplc 0 100 an address that The address offset in the PLC must be has a decimal point is Address written as a constant whole number no written here without the decimals no variables Y So 1 03 is written as 103 Number of elements to read write must be at least 1 and it must be a constant NumElements number If the number of elements is 1 16 100 more than 1 the DestVariable parameter must be declared as an array SetData Function SetData DestData CString strAddr Type int iAddr Off int iDataCount Description Writes data from a variable to a location in the PLC memory Parameter Description Example S DestData Tne nama of the variable to retrieve the The device type and encoding
141. changing the width and height attributes in the Profile tab of the Attributes dialog box see below To change attributes of a graphics object 1 Select the object to be changed then select Change Attributes from the Edit menu You can also double click the object 2 The object s attribute dialog box is displayed Object Attributes defines what the object is or how it behaves i e size position color etc Click OK to accept any changes made or Cancel to cancel any changes gt To view object attributes of multiple graphics objects on a window 1 There will be times when you may want to quickly determine what PLC data registers are tied to which objects in a window This can easily be done using the object attributes command 2 For this example open Window_11 to display the popup window of the sample project 3 On the Edit menu click Select all objects 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 49 4 From the Edit menu click Change Attribute The Object Attribute dialog box is displayed Object Attribute x Sort T Object 5 All of the objects that use PLC data registers or the internal memory of the OIT are listed in this dialog box according to their Object ID tag Alongside each ID tag is the PLC or OIT memory identifier Grouping Objects When creating graphics on a window you may create a complex graphic that is actually composed of several simpler objects overlaid onto each other The scale meter
142. con in the Standard toolbar 1010 1001a Rev 02 134 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual What are states Many of the graphics objects ex Set Word Object or Moving Shape Object use states to determine which picture to display Shapes and bitmaps can be configured with up to 32 different states Each shape can be configured to show a different picture depending upon a state States are used when the shape is tied to an active object that is monitoring a value ina PLC For instance you would use a two state shape to represent a Bit Lamp object You can also use a different picture of a shape for a passive object Click the State pull down box in the Shape or Bitmap library and select a different number Most of the predefined shapes in the libraries have at least two states Using Shape Libraries EasyBuilder includes fourteen shape libraries e balloons slb contains dialog boxes e captions slb contains various rectangle shapes e buttonl slb switches and lamps e button2 slb switches and lamps e button3 slb switches and lamps e button4 slb switches and lamps e buttons slb switches and lamps e electric slb schematic symbols e isa 1l slb isa symbols e isa 2 slb isa symbols e partl slb switches and flags e pipe _m0 slb pipes e pipe ml slb pipes e pipes slb pipes When you start a new project two libraries button and button2 are automatically open To display the Shape Library dialog box A
143. cs objects With these tools you can create simple geometric shapes such as straight lines circles rectangles and polygonal shapes You can also combine several various geometric shapes to form complex shapes that can be stored into one of the graphics libraries for later retrieval The Line Tool Use the Line tool to create straight lines on a window Each line that you create has three parameters associated with it length thickness and color gt To create a line A 1 From the Draw menu click Line or click the Line icon in the Draw toolbar The Attributes dialog box appears 2 Click the pull down box from the Color box The Color dialog box appears 3 Click on the appropriate color box then click OK The color box should reflect what you have chosen 4 Click on the line thickness that you want to use 5 Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are currently editing The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor 6 Click to mark the beginning of the line Move the mouse to the location where the end of the line should be Click the mouse cursor again to mark the end of the line The line object is formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the boundaries of the line 7 To continue creating more lines repeat the last step To move the line just created click on the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in t
144. ct that contains the window screen you wish to copy Use the Browse command button if you are unsure of the location or name of the project file 3 Inthe Source Window No box enter the number of the window screen you wish to copy 1010 1001a Rev 02 48 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 4 Inthe Desti Window No box enter the number of the window screen in the project you are currently editing that you wish to copy the contents of the source window to 5 Click OK The main screen of EasyBuilder is redisplayed with the Window Copy command executed gt To delete a graphics object s 1 Select the object or objects you wish to delete 2 Press the Delete key or from the Edit menu click Delete 2 You can restore the deleted object by using the Undo command gt To movea graphics object s 1 Select the object or objects you wish to move 2 When you place the mouse cursor over a highlighted object the cursor changes to a crosshair This indicates that you are able to move the selected object Move the object by clicking on it and dragging the object to the proper position on the work area gt To resize a graphics object 1 Select the object to be resized 2 To resize the object move the mouse cursor over one of the small black squares The cursor changes to a double arrow icon to indicate that it is in resizing mode 3 Click and drag the mouse to resize the object Objects can also be resized by
145. cted 5 Ifyou wish to open the common window click Open Otherwise click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder Optional settings Displaying popup windows from the common window As with full screen base windows popup windows can be called from the common window In the System Parameters settings you have the option of selecting any popup windows called from the common window to be displayed normally or to display above any popup windows called from a base window Ifthe Normal setting is selected then the popup window called from the common window is displayed on top of any popup windows already on the OIT display Popup windows displayed after common popup window are displayed over it If the Above any others setting is selected then the popup window called from the common window is displayed above any popup windows that may be called from a base window 1010 1001a Rev 02 104 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To set the popup window option for a common window From the Edit menu select System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears 2 Select the General tab In the Common Window frame box select either Normal or Above any others for the Popup Window box 3 Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder The following illustration shows how this setting affects the operation of popup windows called from the common window Popup window 21 was called from the common wind
146. d Complete Download Uploa EasyBuilder Online Simulator Offline Simulator DownLoad UpLoad Jump To RDS Jump To Application Jump To Touch Adjust T Direct Online Simulator Exit 1010 1001a Rev 02 36 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Communications Settings Com Port Select COMI COM10 on the computer to download a project to the OIT Baud Rate Select 38400 or 115200 bps to download or upload a project to the OIT We recommend that you use 115200 unless your computer is unable to transmit at that speed Project or Recipe Download Upload Select Project Download Upload when you want to download the project Select Recipe Download Upload to update your recipe files recipe module only available for some models Complete or Partial Download Upload When you first program the OIT you should select a complete download A complete download should also be used whenever a new version of EZware 500 is used or you receive a Boot ROM update Finally a complete download should be performed whenever the PLC protocol driver is changed If however you are making changes to a project file then you can decrease the download time by selecting partial download upload Operating Modes Click EasyBuilder to start the EasyBuilder application software Click Online Simulator to open a compiled project file eob in on line simulator mode Check Direct Online Simulator to perform online simulation w
147. d R100 If PLC block pack is set to 0 the OIT sends seven separate commands to get the data If PLC block pack is set to 1 the OIT checks the spacing between requested registers If the spacing is more than 1 then a separate command is sent In this example the OIT sends four commands one command to read R1 R2 and R4 one command to read R7 one command to read R12 and R14 and one command to read R100 With most PLC protocol drivers more time is spent with overhead data than getting the actual data that you need With the example above setting the block pack number to 1 probably reduces the time required to update the PLC data by as much as 40 ao properly setting the PLC block pack can have a major impact on the update rate of the OIT If the PLC block pack setting were adjusted to 4 or greater the OIT sends only two commands one command to read R1 R2 R4 R7 and R12 and another command to get R100 The update rate is now probably three times as fast You might think that the best setting is 10 so why not have the PLC block pack always on 10 However in some situations a setting of 10 may actually slow down the update rate For example if the PLC registers displayed on the screen are actually R1 R10 and R40 with the PLC block pack is set to 10 the OIT will send two commands one to get R1 and R10 another to get R40 If the PLC block pack were set to 0 then the OIT would have sent three commands In this case
148. d option Click the Set operation mode pull down box and select Set pen color Click the Attributes button to select the color you want to use Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box Place the new touch screen object on the window screen When this key is pressed it will change the color used when a message is written on the board Clear the Message Board Using the Function Key Object you can program a touch screen object to clear the message board The touch screen object can be placed onto the message board or any other window gt To create a Clear Message Board key 1 DI oe a From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears Click the General tab to display the General form Click the Message Board option Click the Set operation mode pull down box and select Clear board Click the Shape tab to select the shape that you want to use Click the Label tab to select the label Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box Place the new touch screen object on the window screen When this key is pressed it will clear any messages written on the message board Below is an illustration of how a message board might look with all of the options available on the message board Message Board Nessages uritten on the 1 message board uill overlap active and inact ne Clear Board Enter Name Fen Brush fornai En In this example
149. d structures that are required in building macros Macro Sample and Implementation Macros can be used for customizing an application or when a special operation is needed that the normal OIT objects set bit data transfer etc do not provide A few possibilities are listed e Unusual or non linear scaling of data e Displaying the result of arithmetic operations on 2 or more PLC register values e Indirect addressing where a PLC register holds the address of the desired data e Lookup tables e Transferring Data once instead of periodically e Writing data to the PLC in a specific sequence e Timed splash screens A macro is written using the macro utility found in the Tools menu list of Easy Builder The Add button will create a new worksheet to program a new macro The programmer first gives the macro a name in the top right corner Then programming can be added After the code is finished it needs compiled If the code compiles correctly there will be no errors and the macro name will be added to the top list If the macro does not compile correctly it will display error codes If the programmer should cancel out from creating the macro before a successful compile it will put the macro into the bottom panel of the macro list and it will not be available as a usable macro but the text will remain to be edited later The macros are triggered by a setting a bit The bit is specified in the PLC Control Object list The b
150. d to LW9130 If Set Word 0 enables English and English is the configured Language 0 in the Label Library pressing the English Set Word object writing a 0 to LW9130 will enable label text display in English If Set Word 1 enables French and French is the configured Language 1 in the Label Library pressing the French Set Word object 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating and Using Tags and Databases 161 writing a 1 to LW9130 will enable text display in French Continue for all Languages configured in the Label Library 1010 1001a Rev 02 162 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 163 Chapter 8 Representing Data with Graphics Objects EasyBuilder includes several active graphics objects or parts which are used to represent data that is stored in the PLC or internal memory of the OIT The data represented can be single bit coils 16 bit 32 bit or 64 bit registers The data can be represented as numbers ASCII characters or as graphic shapes or bitmaps This chapter focuses on only parts that perform relatively simple functions More complex parts used for alarms trending etc will be reserved for later chapters Using Internal Data Memory of OIT The Silver Series contains internal data memory which can be used to store information that either must be sent to or received from the PLC The OIT has two types of Internal Data Registers Local and Recipe When
151. d to make changes however once a window has been created the window number can not be changed To change the window settings highlight the desired window and click on the Setting button 1010 1001a Rev 02 82 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Assigning a Window Name The Name is a description box used to help you identify what the window is used for without having to actually open the window and look at the contents Up to 50 characters can be entered into this field with space characters allowed Name indow 013 Window No 13 Start Pos X fo y fo Size Width 320 Height 240 M Tracking Monopoly M Clipping T Coherence Style Security Level Lowest Width 4 Color i Background Color ESSE Pattern MV Filled Pattern color DS Frame Cancel Assigning the Window Number Although 1999 windows are available on the Silver Series two are specifically reserved for the Common Window and the Fast Selection window and another eight are reserved for internal use Therefore you can assign 10 255 to any window you create When you initially create a window EasyBuilder will automatically assign the lowest available number to the window However you can assign any number within the allowed range In this manner you can group windows together that may share some common traits Assigning a Position This is the startin
152. d to represent the data in a 16 bit PLC register as a bar graph You can configure the bar graph to move up down right or left The bar graph can be configured with any base number that represents 0 level and any span range You can create the bar graph with an alarm low and high setting to indicate to the OIT operator that an underflow overflow alarm condition exists In addition you can set the alarm low and high limits to be controlled by two additional PLC registers so that the low and high limits are variable Bar graphs can even be constructed with a shape or bitmap overlaying the bar graph to create flow tanks temperature gauges etc gt To create a Bar Graph Object ali 1 From the Parts menu click Bar Graph Or click the Bar Graph icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Bar Graph Object dialog box appears Create Bar Graph Object General Shape Bar Graph Description Read address Device type LW w Device address 0 BIN M No ofwords 1 1010 1001a Rev 02 214 4 5 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Use the Description box to enter a title for the Bar Graph part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part In the Read address frame select the PLC register or OIT internal memory address You can select BIN binary or BCD format In the No of words box select 1 if you want a bar graph without variable al
153. dentifier There are many possibilities for the cause of this compiler error Simply stated the compiler found a problem with the syntax of the statement 2 Used without having been initialized Must define the size of an array during declaration The array size declaration must be a constant whole number not a variable 3 Redefinition error The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique Macro Command main int g 10 g lt illegal redefinition of g For g 2 0 To 2 g 3 4 Next g 2 End Macro Command 6 4 Function name error identifier Reserved keywords and constant can not be the name of a function Macro Command If lt illegal used If in the name 5 Statement missing Statement missing or Some part of the Statement is missing typically it is a missing parentheses Macro Command main lt illegal missing 6 Missing expression in If statement 7 Missing Then in If statement 8 Missing EndIf 9 Unfinished If statement before End If 10 Illegal Else statement 1010 1001a Rev 02 258 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual The format of If statement is If logic expression Then Else If logic expression Then EndIf Any format other than this format will cause compile error e 11 There shou
154. e z Centering is based on the horizontal center of the left most object 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the objects back in their original position Using the align vertical center command 1 Select the objects you wish to align For this example select the three rectangle objects of Window_ 12 2 From the Edit menu click Align then Vert Center or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size Centering is based on the vertical center of the top most object 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the objects back in their original position Making Objects the Same Size This feature is handy if you want to quickly make two or more objects the same size This is most often used when 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 55 you are trying to overlap objects that must be the same size To better illustrate refer to the left side of Window_ 12 of the sample project Alignment Nake Same Size gt The make same width command 1 Select the objects you wish to make the same width For this example select the left and center rectangle objects of Window _12 2 From the Edit menu click Make Same Size then Width or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size 7 EasyBuilder always uses the width of the last object that was created as the basis for the width In this example the left rectangle was created first t
155. e Displays information about the availability of the following OIT resources e RAM memory e Timers e Queues Data Monitor Shows live PLC data polling based on individual object types Emulator Setting Sets up how the Simulator appears and operates Print Screen preview amp save to file Prints a picture of the current screen displayed To preview before printing select Screen Preview Print screen to a file will create a bitmap image of the screen Print Window preview amp save to file To print object address information within select Window printing and then select the Table radio button To preview select Window Preview Selecting Print window to a file creates a bitmap image of the screen data Capturing Simulation Screens to Use as Documentation To capture screen pictures for creating documentation 1 Run the simulator either on line or off line 2 When the window to be captured is displayed hold the ALT key down and push the PRINT SCREEN key on your keyboard This will send a bitmap image of the simulation window to the clipboard 1010 1001a Rev 02 32 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 3 Open a word document or your publishing software and PASTE CTRL V the image from the clipboard Wiring for Normal Simulation Mode This section describes how to connect the PC PLC OIT for Online Simulation in the Normal mode To configure the OIT using Simulation Mode you will n
156. e page only but with the hold feature enabled Hold plot display or Available if Multiple pages is selected Select Hold plot display to Hold style Hold plot display amp have the option of freezing the display Select Hold plot display amp clear clear if you want to clear the display Sampling time 1 to 65535 seconds Time interval between sampling and plotting of data 1010 1001a Rev 02 Bar Graphs Meters and Trends 221 Plot point 10 to 255 Number of times that a sampling occurs per page Device type PLC or OIT internal memory address Read address ee This is the starting address that is read from to get the data to plot BIN or BCD Select binary BIN or BCD format If Multiple pages is selected this 16 bit register represents the position the window is located on the multi page graph If the value Device type is 0 then the window is at the foremost or front of the graph For each increment of this value the window moves back by one plot Scroll control point Device address PLC or OIT internal memory address BIN or BCD Select binary BIN or BCD format Device tvpe If Multiple pages is selected this coil register is used to enable the ype hold function If the coil is set then the hold function is activated Hold control De evice Address PLC or OIT internal memory address 3 Click the Plot tab to displ
157. e the icons are located on the rightmost end of the menu bar of EasyBuilder Creating a New Window Whenever you create a new project the initial window Window 10 the fast selection window Window 4 the common window Window 6 and the numeric keypad window Window 50 are automatically created To create a new window the following steps must be performed 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 81 gt To create a new window 1 From the Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears Open Window J No Window name Size Fast Selection Common Window __New Window 10 Initial 320 240 Settin 50 NumericKeypad 320 240 da Delete Open Close 2 Click New Window The Select Window Style dialog box appears Select Window Style Fast Selection Common Window Close 3 Click Base Window The Fast Selection and Common Window buttons appear grayed out because those windows have already been created The Window Setting dialog box appears 4 Modify the window parameters then press OK The Open Window dialog box reappears 5 Ifyou wish to open the window you just created click on the window and click Open Otherwise click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder Window Settings Let s look more closely at the parameters you can change when creating a new window 2 When a window is initially created the window settings can be edite
158. e Alarm Display Object n General Description Read address i Device type LW w Device address 10 Y No of words 1 Attribute 7 T Display line 5 Char length 5 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Alarm Display part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Read address frame select the 16 bit PLC register or OIT internal memory address that will be monitored by the Alarm Display part for the scrollable window You can select BIN binary or BCD format 4 The No of words box is set at 1 and cannot be changed 5 Inthe Attribute frame select what type of options the Alarm Display uses Function Range Description Selects how many alarms to display in the scrollable window The number of lines refers to Display line 1 to 14 lines that are Size 16 font If the alarm text string is Size 24 font then two lines are required for every alarm displayed Selects how long the scrollable window is Select a length that is equal to the maximum length Char length 1 to 39 of the largest alarm text string If Size 24 font is used for the alarm text string then two characters are required for each character in the text string 6 Click OK to close the Create Alarm Display Object dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at
159. e Alternates between setting and clearing a PLC coil Momentary Sets a PLC coil when pressed clears a PLC coil when released Set ON at window open Automatically sets a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is opened Set OFF at window open Automatically clears a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is opened Periodical toggle sei teal a PLC coil as long as the window that the part is located interval Used for the Periodical toggle feature to determine the period at which the bit is toggled Range 0 0 to 3 0 seconds Set ON at window close Automatically sets a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is closed Set OFF at window close Automatically clears a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is closed Set ON at window Automatically sets a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is maximized maximized Set OFF at window Automatically clears a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is maximized maximized 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 175 Set ON at window Automatically sets a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is minimized minimized Set OFF at window Automatically clears a PLC coil when the window that the part is located in is minimized minimized Set ON at backlight off Automatically sets a PLC coil when the backlight screen saver feat
160. e Option Menu click Grid Snap The Grid Snap Settings dialog box appears 2 Click the Fix Objects checkbox 3 Click OK Movement by mouse cursor is now disabled gt To zoom in on the selected window 100 y Use the zoom pulldown menu at the top right of the screen To change the state of the selected window State 0 y 1 Use the zoom pulldown menu at the top right of the screen The objects will appear as they would in the selected state To change the language to enable language specific characters 1 Onthe Option Menu click Language Then select your appropriate option To use a particular language EasyBuilder must be installed in that version of Windows Basic Editing Commands gt To select a graphics object he 1 On the Edit Menu click Select or click the mouse cursor icon in the Draw toolbar 2 Click on the graphics object For example using Window_12 click on Alignment This causes the text box to be selected with small square blocks around the edges indicating the boundaries of the object Deselect the object by clicking somewhere else in the work area 1010 1001a Rev 02 46 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 3 When a graphics object is selected it can then be modified copied deleted or moved to a new location n n n Alignment n n n Nake Same Size p gt To select multiple graphics objects 1 On the Edit Menu click Select or click the mouse cursor icon in the Draw
161. e Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears 2 Highlight the base window you wish to use 3 Click the Setting command button The Window Setting dialog box appears 4 Click the pull down list box for each Underlay Window to assign the underlay window screens to the base window 5 Click OK Click Close on the Window Setting dialog box Rules That Apply to Underlay Windows Please note the rules that apply when you use the underlay window feature 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 91 e Only the objects of an underlay window are displayed on the base window All background information about the underlay window i e background color frame color and size etc are not displayed on the base window e Active objects can be overlaid on top of each other over two or more underlay windows For example a Set Bit object that is configured to set an OIT local bit LBO is located at X 20 Y 50 for Underlay Window 1 Another Set Bit object that controls LB1 is placed on Underlay Window 2 at the same location When the Base Window displays these two windows both objects will be active so that when they are pressed both LBO and LB1 will be set e Static objects may be overlaid using underlay windows However any static object that is on the Base Window has the highest precedence and will be displayed over any static objects that are on the underlay windows Active objects have higher precedence over static obj
162. e any of the attributes double click on the polygon to display the Polygon Object s Attribute dialog box The Scale Lines Tool The Scale Lines tool is used to create scales Each scale created has four parameters associated with it size thickness color and filled gt To create a scale at 1 From the Draw menu click Scale Or click the Scale icon in the Draw toolbar 2 Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are currently editing The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor 3 Click to mark a corner of the scale Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the scale should be Click the mouse cursor again to mark the corner of the scale The scale object is formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the perimeter of the scale 4 From the Edit menu select Change Attribute The Scale Object s Attribute dialog box appears 1010 1001a Rev 02 128 10 Using Text Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual In the Frame section of the Style tab click the pull down arrow of the Color box and select a color Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Scale Object s Attribute dialog box Click on the line thickness that you want to use In the Scale section select from one of the six Styles Down 3 Riza ne X N Enter the number of divisions in the Division box For Up Down Full and Size
163. e cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor Click to mark a corner of the rectangle Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the rectangle should be Click the mouse cursor again to mark the corner of the rectangle The rectangle object is formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the perimeter of the rectangle To continue creating more rectangles repeat the last step To move the rectangle just created click on the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar Move the rectangle to the preferred location To change any of the attributes double click on the rectangle to display the Rectangle Object s Attribute dialog box The Ellipse Circle Tool The ellipse tool is used to create ellipses or circles Each ellipse created has four parameters associated with it size thickness color and filled gt To create an ellipse O The Arc Tool 1 2 From the Draw menu click Ellipse Circle or click the Ellipse Circle icon in the Draw toolbar The Attributes dialog box appears If the interior of the ellipse is to be filled with a color check the Filled box Two additional settings appear If you want to fill the ellipse with a solid color then select a color for the Interior box Click Pattern Style to display the Pattern Style dialog box Select the upper left most pattern for a solid color If you want to use a pattern for the filled sectio
164. e number of total pop ups possible The setting is in the system parameters General tab The default is 6 change this to 4 and the memory will increase be re allocated for window 0 background task functions Variable Declarations Each variable that will be used in the macro needs to be declared as a specific type of register The declarations are listed as the first part of the macro Any declarations contained within the macro function is considered Local and any variable outside the macro function is considered Global Local variables are only seen within the function they are declared in Global variables retain their values and can be globally used by all functions Below are listed the various data types that can be declared TypeDescription Float Single Precision Floating point variable 32 bit signed IEEE 754 format Int Integer variable 32 bit signed Short Short integer variable 16 bit signed Char 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 249 Character variable Bool Boolean variable 8 bit unsigned 1 bit Variables inside macros are initialized to all 1 s as a default i e OxFFFF so don t assume they are zero values when you enter the macro It is good programming practice to initialize variables during declaration or use assignment statements before they are used Variable Initialization Initialize a value of variable in the declaration statement directly
165. e settings in EasyManager are used After the download is finished the Mission Complete dialog box is displayed Click OK The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears 6 You will now use EasyManager to get the OIT to execute the project you just downloaded If you want to exit EasyBuilder from the File menu click Exit n gt Displaying your project on the OIT 1 From the Windows Task Bar click EasyManager The EasyManager dialog box appears 2 Click Jump To Application This will send a command to the OIT to run the project 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Your First Project 27 3 The OIT should display the following screen Startup Screen 4 Press the ON function key to display the popup window Startup Screen 5 Press the increment and decrement keys on the OIT to see the value in the data register and scale meter change Press the OFF function key to remove the popup window CONGRATULATIONS You have completed your first EZware 500 project 1010 1001a Rev 02 28 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Simulator Mode 29 Chapter 3 Simulator Mode As you saw from creating the sample project in the last chapter downloading any changes you make to the OIT can take time To decrease the amount of time required to download a project to the OIT you can make these changes in EasyManager e Select the 115200 baud rate The default setting of 38400 is recommended for older co
166. e the operation mode used when a message is written on the board Set the Pen Style for the Message Board Using the Function Key Object you can program a touch screen object to change the thickness of the line used for the pen The touch screen object can be placed onto the message board or any other window gt To create a ag Message Board Pen Style key From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears Click the General tab to display the General form Click the Message Board option Click the Set operation mode pull down box and select Set pen style Click the Attributes button to select the line width you want to use Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box 7 Place the new touch screen object on the window screen dia po When this key is pressed it will change the line thickness used when a message is written on the board Set the Pen Color for the Message Board Using the Function Key Object you can program a touch screen object to change the color used for the pen The touch screen object can be placed onto the message board or any other window 1010 1001a Rev 02 122 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To create a Change Message Board Pen Color key l Oy ipo o 7 From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears Click the General tab to display the General form Click the Message Boar
167. e to decrement the contrast 9093 9099 Reserved for future use 1010 1001a Rev 02 166 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual V 2 6 0 These bits are mapped to PLC Nodes 0 127 Bit 9100 9227 PLC Communication Status R W changes to 1 when the communication times out Write 0 to resume the communication ui V 2 6 0 These bits are mapped to AUX device nodes 0 127 Bit 9228 9355 AA communication R W changes to 1 when the communication times out Write to 0 to resume communication 9356 9959 Reserved for future use 9360 Compact Flash Status Adon epee 9361 Recipe Transtertom Compact R W Set to 1 to start transfer 9362 9999 Reserved for future use Reserved Local Word LW Table Address Function Access Description RWI and RBI use this index to access recipe data Maximum 9000 Recipe Index Base db value for correct functionality is 32 767 9001 Reserved for future use This represents the maximum value allowed when a Numeric 9002 9003 Maximum Value Numeric Input Rdonly Input Object is active If no Numeric Input Object is active the value is 0 as This represents the minimum value allowed when a Numeric 9004 9005 Minimum Value Numeric Input Rgonly Input Object is active If no Numeric Input Object is active the J value is 0 This value represents the current operation mode of the Messa
168. e use 9040 9041 Window Security Level password Write Only This 32 bit register is used to enter passwords to change the window security level Must use binary decimal 32 bit format Write only access because OIT changes value back to 0 after password is read 9042 Window Security Level RdOnly This is the current level of window security 0 1 or 2 9043 Force Window Security Level R W This register can be used to force the window security level to a lower level without entering a password 9044 Momentary Key Release Popup Window conflict R W This register affects how a Set Bit Object configured as Momentary behaves if a popup window is displayed over the key as it is being released If LW9044 0 the coil assigned to the momentary key is cleared when the operator releases the key even if a popup window is now overlaid on top of the key If LW9044 1 in this mode no popup windows can be displayed until after the momentary key is released Any requests by the OIT or the PLC to display a popup window are ignored If LW9044 2 the momentary key coil remains set if a popup window covers the momentary key before it is released 9045 9049 Reserved for future use 9050 Base Window ID RdOnly This is the number of the base window currently displayed 9051 Base Window Reserved RdOnly This register is used by the PLC control object if the master register
169. e window Delete Setting 2 Click Add The PLC Control Object s Attribute dialog box appears Description Change Window Read address Device type DM Device address o BIN hd M Aux E rAttribute Type of control Change window Macro name Cancel 3 Select the Device type and Device Address for the actual PLC address you wish to monitor 7 The OIT will write the number of the newly displayed window to the next consecutive address after the address specified in this step 4 Select either BIN binary or BCD format 5 Click OK to return to the PLC Control Object dialog box 6 You should see a new entry that lists the PLC address that is monitored by the OIT The PLC must only enter window numbers that represent full size windows when using the PLC Control Object function The OIT automatically closes any open windows before the window called by the PLC Control Object is displayed 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 95 The Direct and Indirect Window Objects If you want the PLC to call up a popup window that is to be overlaid on top of other windows already open then there are two methods used to do this e Direct Window Object e Indirect Window Object Unlike the PLC Control Object the Direct and Indirect Window Objects are only active for the windows that they are placed into The Direct Window Object is used to display a popup
170. eate switches that are very fine in resolution Unlike many other touch screen OITs on the market the Silver Series is not limited to a fixed number of cells in which switches can be created The OIT programmer can create as many switches of varying sizes and shapes as he wishes limited only by the total amount of memory available for the project Three LED indicators are provided on the face of the Silver Series OIT to provide instant feedback to the OIT operator of the current operating condition of the OIT LED Indicator PWR LED yellow CPU LED green COM LED red Purpose indicates if power is applied to the OIT indicates if the OIT is operating correctly indicates communications activity on PLC port The Silver Series OIT has two serial ports which provide a connection to a PLC using RS 232 or RS 485 communications and an RS 232 connection to a computer for programming The serial ports also provide the ability to connect multiple OITs in series to a single PLC port The two serial ports also provide the ability to use the EZware 500 configuration software in Simulation Mode enabling the OIT programmer to test his project on the PC instead of downloading the project to the OIT The Silver Series is powered using 24VDC The viewing level of the OIT display can be adjusted using a contrast switch located on the back of the unit or using Local Bits LB9091 and LB9092 for Contrast Up Down Finally
171. ecessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Read address frame select the 16 bit PLC register or OIT internal memory address that the part continuously reads You can select BIN binary or BCD format 4 Inthe Write address frame select the 16 bit PLC register or OIT internal memory address that the part writes to when pressed You can select BIN binary or BCD format 5 Inthe Attribute frame select how you want the MultiState Switch object to operate Switch Style Option Description Increments the PLC register by 1 each time the key is pressed When the highest state is JOG reached the key resets to State 0 No of states Range 1 to 32 Decrements the PLC register by 1 each time the key is pressed When the State 0 is JOG reached the key resets to the highest state No of states Range 1 to 32 6 Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab 7 Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab 8 Click OK The Create MultiState Switch Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 9 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label This
172. ect from a range of 10 100 Click on the Window button to change settings for the Window Bar key The Fast Selection key can be modified by clicking the Screen button The Window Attribute dialog box appears You can change the shape used for the two hot keys or the label that identifies them You can also change the speed at which these keys display the Window Bar and the Fast Selection Window Creating a Message Board You may have an application for an OIT in which the OIT operator must be able to leave messages for someone else to read The message board feature creates a popup window that can be displayed on the OIT for such a purpose Once displayed the OIT operator draws on the touch screen to write messages The messages remain on the message board until a touch screen command is issued to clear the message board or the OIT is reset One message board may be created per project and it must be created from a popup window You can only call up the message board using the Direct Window Object The message board popup window can contain any graphics objects and the OIT operator can write over any graphics objects that appear on the window gt To create a Message Board 1 Create a Base Window that is partially sized to be used as a popup window 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 121 2 From the Edit menu click System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box is displayed 3 Click the General tab to display the
173. ects e Popup windows cannot display underlay windows e Underlay windows are always positioned from the top left corner of the screen Any position settings you make when creating the underlay window are ignored when the window is displayed by a Base Window as an underlay window For more information and an example of how to use underlay windows consult the EasyBuilder Help files Creating a Frame EasyBuilder provides the option of having a frame around any window that you create You can select from seven sizes 4 6 8 10 12 14 or 16 pixels wide The default setting is no frame If a frame is selected you can select one of 16 colors Window Background You can also select a different background color for each window created The default setting is black gt To select a different background color 1 From the Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears 2 Click on the window that you wish to change the background color Click Setting The Window Setting dialog box appears 3 Inthe Background frame section check the Filled box Click the pull down arrow of the Color box The Color dialog box appears 5 Select from one of the 16 basic colors or add 16 new colors from the customized list of colors To create a customized color click on one of the boxes in the Customized color box then click Customize color 6 The color table dialog box appears allowing you to select one of the 256 colors available
174. ecurity Control R 1 Enables Security control of windows 60072 Password for Level 0 R W Contains password value 2 words 32 bits 60074 Password for Level 1 R W Contains password value 2 words 32 bits 60076 Password for Level 1 R W Contains password value 2 words 32 bits If Recipe Save System Parameter is set to Yes then set a bit of LB 9044 to ON will restore these system parameters from these recipe word memory Representing PLC Coil Registers PLC coils or binary registers and internal coils of the OIT are represented using three parts the Bit Lamp Object the Set Bit Object and the Toggle Switch Object Each has a particular function that makes them unique but they are all constructed and used in essentially the same manner The Bit Lamp Object The Bit Lamp Object is used to represent the value of a PLC coil The object continuously reads the PLC coil and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the On or Off state of the coil 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 171 gt To create a Bit Lamp Object e 1 From the Parts menu click Bit Lamp Or click the Bit Lamp icon in the Partl toolbar The Create Bit Lamp Object dialog box appears Create Bit Lamp Object x General Shape Label Description Read address i Device type LB w Device address 0 Attribute Function Normal v 2 Use the D
175. ed Input low 2147483648 to This is the lowest data value allowed when the OIT 2147483647 Operator enters a number Inout high 2147483648 to This is the highest data value allowed when the OIT P gn 2147483647 operator enters a number 1010 1001a Rev 02 190 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual No above Dec specifies number of digits to the left of the decimal point No below Dec 0 10 specifies number of digits to the right of the decimal point Single Float calo 2147483648 to This is the lowest data value allowed when the OIT p 2147483647 operator enters a number lnbutiah 2147483648 to This is the highest data value allowed when the OIT P gn 2147483647 operator enters a number No above Dec 1 10 specifies number of digits to the left of the decimal point No below Dec 0 10 e number of digits to the right of the decimal Double Float 2147483648 to This is the lowest data value allowed when the OIT Inputlow 2147483647 operator enters a number inputhidh 2147483648 to This is the highest data value allowed when the OIT p gn 2147483647 operator enters a number 1010 1001a Rev 02 9 Create Numeric Input Extend Object n General Numeric Shape Font Click the Shape tab to configure a shape or bitmap that is displayed behind the number 10 Click the Font tab to display the Fo
176. eed an OIT Configuration Cable Maple P N 7431 0098 Connect the end marked HMI into Port 2 on the OIT marked PLC RS 485 PC RS 232 and connect the end marked PC into the proper COM port on your PC Plug the end marked PLC into the appropriate port on your PLC See the figure below for serial port pin assignments and the following two figures on the next page for connecting the Silver Series to a PC anda PLC NO 9 UA fu E fu to OIT to PC Serial Port Pin Assignments The following section describes how to connect the PC OIT for Online Simulation in the Direct mode Note the following restrictions e Maple Systems standard communication cables will not work in Direct mode The OIT end of the cable must be wired for the PC s serial port e To simulate protocols using RS422 485 an RS422 485 card must be installed in the PC e The Allen Bradley DH485 and Telemecanique UniTelWay protocols are not supported in Direct mode To configure Direct Online Simulation you will need a cable connecting the PC to the PLC Standard Maple communication cables will not work The cable needs to be wired such that the PLC s RX pin s is connected to the PC s TX pin s and the PLC s TX pin s is connected to the PC s RX pin s Any common pins also need to be brought through and shield connections should also be made Refer to Maple Systems communications cable drawings for guidance but remember that the OIT end w
177. efault setting The Part Layout setting allows you to control the level on which objects are displayed during runtime The Control setting causes the OIT to bring objects to the top layer when the object is updated The Nature setting causes the OIT to leave the objects on the layer in which they were placed during development Address Mode Allows the OIT to access more than one PLC Select extended when connecting to multiple PLCs Select standard if connecting to one PLC only For more information on this feature see Networking Multiple Controllers Using Modbus RTU Extended V3 Protocol at the end of this chapter 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 67 Hardware Settings Configuration System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux LCD TFT PCD value w Displaymode Landscape w Recipe Eventlog database DataBase start address System parameter e TFT PCD value Used to adjust the refresh rate of the TFT display This option applies only to the OITs with TFT LCD display type This option allows you to select high or low refresh rate We recommend using the high refresh setting e Display mode Used to select the OIT s display mode The two options are landscape and portrait The default is landscape e Eventlog database Enables storing of the event log data in part of the recipe module s non volatile storage e DataBase start address T
178. en click Unattach Lib A dialog box appears asking if you really want to unattach the selected library Click Yes 3 The Shape Library dialog box reappears and the library is removed from the Shape library list You have the option of creating a new library This can be very useful when organizing shapes 1010 1001a Rev 02 136 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To create a new shape library 1 With the Shape Library dialog box displayed click New Lib The New Library dialog box appears 2 Enter a name for the new library Click OK The Shape Library dialog box appears with the new library loaded Click Close The new library is now available to this project but it is not stored into the Library subdirectory of EasyBuilder until the project file has been saved AY Creating deleting and placing shapes EasyBuilder provides drawing tools that can be used to create shapes For more information on how to use the drawing tools consult the first part of this chapter The shapes that you create can be permanently stored into the shape libraries for access by any project gt To add a new shape to a library 0 1 This example shows how to add a two state shape to a library You must first create the shapes that you plan on storing using the drawing tools supplied with EasyBuilder The shapes can be any size You can use any combination of drawing tools to create the shape A E E E E E
179. en depending upon the control of the PLC This can be used to simulate a control process such as some products moving on a conveyor system to different parts of the plant 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects gt To create a Moving Shape Object fa 195 1 From the Parts menu click Moving Shape Or click the Moving Shape icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Moving Shape Object dialog box appears Create Moving Shape Object fi General Shape Label K Description Read address i Device type LW v Device address 0 BN el Attribute Style X axis only No of states 1 v Input low 10 Input high 1 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Moving Shape part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Read address frame select the starting PLC coil or OIT internal memory address that the part reads from You can select BIN binary or BCD format The number of registers read depends upon the Style used 4 Inthe Attribute frame select how you want the Moving Shape object to operate Style Option Description Reads two 16 bit registers Register 1 determines the state of the shape displayed Register 2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis The OIT places the shape relative to the starting location For example if the shape is located on
180. ensional only Arrays can contain up to 65 535 elements The type is the declaration of the array of elements such as an array of ints or shorts or bools etc The array_size is the number of elements to contain in the array such as an array of 10 would contain 10 elements of the declared type The first register in an array always begins with the 0 element and the last register is the declared number of elements minus 1 The format is type Array_Name Array_Size For example char table 100 The above declaration defines an array of 100 type char registers named table The first element in table is address 0 and the last is 99 so it would be used as char FirstElement char Last Element FirstElement table 0 LastElement table 99 Using Macros Within Recipes The macro utility can easily use the recipe memory area There are 60 000 recipe word registers that are available to the user for general use addresses RW 0 to RW 59999 Recipe memory at address RW 60000 and above are reserved and have special functions See the Easy Builder Help section or view technical note TN1099 for the current reserved memory listing Register types RW RWI and the pointer LW 9000 can be used to read or write the recipe memory area RW registers are used to directly address a recipe register RWI registers are used to indirectly address a recipe register by using the pointer in local word memory L
181. er At the bottom of the menu click System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears The dialog box has three tabs PLC General and Indicator Select the PLC tab Select Slave from the Multiple OIT box Select either 38400 or 115200 for the HMI HMI link speed Make sure this setting matches the setting for the master OIT Select a unique station number in the HMI station no box for each slave OIT Click OK to save the System Parameters settings and return to the main screen of EasyBuilder Sharing Data Between the Master OIT and Slave OIT Each OIT can be programmed to access data from the PLC as though it were the only OIT connected to the PLC The master OIT will poll each slave OIT connected and allows each OIT to retrieve data from the PLC You can also exchange data between the slave OITs and the master OIT Any local word registers LW or local bits LB located in the master OIT can be accessed and written to by the slave OITs Do this by using the Ms LW and Ms _ LB memory registers For example if the master OIT is storing data in LW10 the slave OIT can access that data by using Ms LWI0 1010 1001a Rev 02 72 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual If the slave OITs and the master OIT are both accessing the same areas of memory in the PLC it becomes more efficient to program the master OIT to access the PLC memory than create a Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC data to LW and LB registers ins
182. er Application 38 Managing Projects 39 Printing Projects 41 Editing and Creating Screen Objects 42 General Settings 58 Security Settings Configuration 64 Restart the OIT Automatically after a Project is Downloaded 69 Automatically Save and Compile the Projects riser isa et paa 69 Compact Flash 69 Connecting Multiple OITs to one PLC 70 Hardware Connection 70 Software Connection 71 Sharing Data Between the Master OIT and Slave OIT 71 Connecting Multiple OITs Using the Ethernet Port 72 Sharing Data Between the Master OIT Slave OIT and PLC 75 Using the Aux Port 76 Chapter 5 Creating Windows 79 Windows Fundamentals 79 Opening a Window 79 Creating a New Window 80 Setting the Window Security Level 89 Assigning Underlay Windows 90 How to Display Underlay Windows 90 Rules That Apply to Underlay Windows 90 Deleting a Window 92 Using Base Windows 92 How to Display Base Windows 92 Using the Common Window 101 Optional settings 103 Changing the Active Common Window e ees 106 Using the Fast Selection Window 108 Using the Fast Selection Key 111 Changing screens using the Fast Selection
183. er Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To create a Set Word Object ES 1 From the Parts menu click Set Word Or click the Set Word icon in the Partl toolbar The Create Set Word Object dialog box appears Create Set Word Object General Shape Label Description Write address Device type LW w Device address 10 BIN Y Attribute Set style Add value JOG Inc value lo Upper limit lo 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Set Word part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Write address frame select the PLC coil or OIT internal memory address You can select BIN binary or BCD format 4 Inthe Attribute frame select how you want the Set Word object to operate Set Style Option Description Places a 16 bit number in a PLC register when pressed Set Value Constant used Range 32768 to 65535 Increases the value in a 16 bit PLC register by a step value each time it is pressed Set Constant Add value JOG Inc value Amount of the step value Range 1 to 32767 Upper limit The upper range allowed Range 32768 to 32767 Increases the value in a 16 bit PLC register by a step value each time it is pressed If the key is held down then it will continue to increase by the step value at a predefined rate Inc value Amount of the step value Range 1 to 32767
184. eric Data Object Decimal Display to display on OIT This register contains the day of month date when the project was 9094 Project Compiled Date Day RdOnly last compiled Use the Numeric Data Object Decimal Display to display on OIT 9095 9099 Reserved for future use ieee at This register stores the window number requested using the 9100 Indirect Window Object window RdOnly Indirect Window Object E i SEE This register can be used to store an offset that is added to 9101 Indirect Window Object Offset RN LW9100 when using the Indirect Window Object 9102 9129 Reserved for future use 9130 Change language R W V 2 5 0 This register changes the language set Values 0 3 V 2 6 0 Li Battery Measurement If value 1175 3 02V If value lt 1070 or 2 75V then replace the battery 9135 Battery Voltage BIN RdOnly Create a Numeric Display for LW 9135 set Input high 1175 and set engineering high 302 Then display should show proper voltage O inactive 9136 CF Recipe Transfer RdOnly 1 1ransiarma process 2 Transfer complete 3 Transfer failed 9137 9999 Reserved for future use Reserved Recipe Word RW Table Address Function Access Description 60000 Real Time Clock RTC R W This register is used to store the seconds count for the optional Seconds RTC BCD code valid values 0 59 60001 Real Time Clock RTC R W This register is used to store the minutes count for the optional Minutes RTC BCD code valid valu
185. eric keys as well as control keys i e Delete Enter Clear etc gt To create a Function Key Object En 1 From the Parts menu click Function Key Or click the Function Key icon in the Part1 toolbar The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Function Key part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Just below the Description box are four control key options Control keys are used during data entry to perform a specific function Create Function Key Object EEE General Shape Label Description O ENT O ES O CLR O ESC JASCII Character a Hard copy Change window Retum to previous Change common window Popup window Close window JOG FS window O Window bar Minimize window Message board Function Description Configures the Function Key as an Enter key When pressed it will write the alphanumeric ENT characters entered into a Numeric Input Object or ASCII Input Object to the target PLC register BS Configures the Function Key as a Delete key When pressed it will delete the last alphanumeric character entered 1010 1001a Rev 02 202 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Configures the Function Key as a Clear key When pressed it will clear the data displayed in CLR the Numeric Input Ob
186. ers 1 2 Click the Edit menu on the main screen of EasyBuilder At the bottom of the menu click System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears The dialog box has six tabs PLC General Indicator Security Editor and Hardware Select the PLC tab Select the PLC that you are using or MemoryMap_Master from the PLC type pull down box Select RS485 from the Serial port I F box Select 8 bits from the Data bits box Select 1 bit from the Stop bits box Select 19200 from the Baud rate box Select Odd from the Parity box Select 0 for the OIT station No and PLC station No Boxes Select Disable from the Multiple OIT box Select 3 0 from the PLC time out constant box Select 0 from the PLC block pack box Now click on the General tab Select 10 for the Startup window No Box Click OK to return to the EasyBuilder main screen The communications parameters selected above were selected at random Please enter the PLC type and communications parameters that match your PLC For more information consult your PLC operations manual or Maple Systems Controller Information Sheets available on our website at www maple systems com Creating a Startup Window We will configure Window 10 as the startup screen The OIT can store up to 1999 predefined windows but screens 0 9 are reserved Therefore the first window screen that is available for configuration is Window 10 By default this is the star
187. ers Within Macros 255 Font files Using 39 font size changing 131 Full screen windows displaying 94 Function Key Object creating keypads 203 Function Key Object displaying windows 94 G General Settings 63 Graphics Objects o sos a ia pi 3 Sud COLOR yz ey aes Se tee ow eer oS SS Ae AS to eS 46 Grid function pixar be koe et be we 46 SHASIZS ua Be aw ee e S ae 46 Group Libraries definition 149 Group Libraries deleting a group member 152 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Grouping objects LL 51 H Hard Copy lt 2 lt 6 84 4 4 a4 eee ba Re EES 264 Hardware Settings Configuration 69 I increment key ec nie HEL RRR A HS 26 Indicator Settings Configuration 65 Indirect Window Object 96 Installing the OIT 11 Internal OIT Memory 165 J Jog featute lai E E 182 K Keypad creating o LL 203 Keypad displaying and using 206 L Labeling an Object 175 languages iL 162 Languages e aene a A aon LO pEr 155 Layering tools e y oe bee he ee eS 52 LED Indicators Lilli 4 Libraries Graphics using 135 Line tools using 4 127 LOCK uo a ssa oe POSE e Bw Bead 60 M Macros ue a a we e 247 Macros Array initialization 251 Macros Memory Usage 250 Macros usi
188. es 0 59 60002 Real Time Clock RTC R W This register is used to store the hour count for the optional RTC Hour BCD code valid values 0 23 60003 Real Time Clock RTC R W This register is used to store the day of the month for the optional Day Of Month RTC BCD code valid values 0 31 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 169 60004 Real Time Clock RTC R W This register is used to store the month for the optional RTC Month BCD code valid values 0 11 60005 Real Time Clock RTC R W This register is used to store the year for the optional RTC BCD Year code valid values 0 9999 60006 Real Time Clock RTC R W This register is used to store the day of the week for the optional Day of the Week RTC BCD code valid values 0 6 with 0 Sunday Non volatile Storage of System Parameters System Parameters can be stored in the non volatile memory held in the Recipe module To enable this feature see the Hardware tab of the Set System Parameters dialog Under the Edit menu select System Parameters 7 The OIT must be restarted in order to activate any changes The System Parameters are divided into three groups PLC Settings General Settings Security Settings PLC Settings Address Function Description 60040 Serial port 0 RS232 1 RS485 60041
189. escription box to enter a title for the Bit Lamp part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 In the Read address frame select the PLC coil or OIT internal memory address 4 Inthe Attribute frame select how you want the Bit Lamp object to operate Function Option Description Normal Displays State 0 object when coil is clear displays State 1 object when coil is set Blinking on State 1 Displays State 0 object when coil is clear blinks State 1 object when coil is set Blinking on State 0 Displays State 0 object when coil is clear blinks State 0 object when coil is set Break time This is the time period for the blinking option in 1 10ths of a second increments 0 default of 1 10th second Range 0 to 2 147 483 647 1010 1001a Rev 02 172 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 5 Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form Create Bit Lamp Object peo Pa a PE i o al 6 Select either a shape or bitmap to represent the Bit Lamp object If you need more information on how to do this consult Chapter 6 Creating Graphics Objects 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 173 7 Click the Label tab to display the Label form Create Bit Lamp Object ES General Shape Label Attribute Color re Font 2 y Align Left v State 0 e Content P
190. example let s look at an OIT screen in which Popup Window 13 is a child window that was called by an object in Popup Window 12 the parent window 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 87 Without clipping if we move Window 13 so that a portion of the window is out of the area covered by Window 12 then the entire area of Window 13 is still shown on the OIT screen With clipping enabled on Window 13 the same move would cut off part of Window 13 Like the tracking feature clipping is most often used to reinforce the notion that one window is tied to the operation of another window Coherence Feature Normally when a popup window is displayed on the OIT screen it covers all other windows that are currently displayed on screen The coherence feature causes the popup window to be displayed underneath all other windows currently displayed In other words the coherence feature makes that window subordinate to all other windows When the coherence feature is applied to a popup window you will see the entire popup window only if there are no other popup windows taking up the same area The coherence feature only works if the popup window that has this feature enabled is called from a full screen base window Ifthe popup window child is called from another popup window parent then the child window will appear above the parent even with the coherence feature enabled 1010 1001a Rev 02 88 Silver Series Installation amp Oper
191. ffect how it operates with other popup windows Tracking Feature The tracking feature causes any popup window that was called from another popup window to move when the first popup window is moved Think of a parent child relationship in which the calling popup window is the parent and the called popup window is the child Any place that the parent window moves the child window follows This includes maximizing and minimizing the windows into an icon If tracking is enabled and the parent window is minimized to an icon then the child window is automatically minimized at the same time For example suppose that the OIT displays the following 1010 1001a Rev 02 84 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Then popup window 12 is displayed If window 13 has the tracking feature enabled then moving window 12 the parent will cause window 13 the child to move as well This is because window 13 was called from an object on window 12 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 85 The tracking feature is often used in instances in which you want to make it very clear that the information on one window the child always pertains to another window the parent Monopoly Feature The monopoly feature is used to monopolize all touch screen action that can occur on the OIT screen For instance suppose the OIT display is currently showing a full screen window with several touch screen objects If a po
192. file called ASCFONT 16 e The Type 24 font is used to display the size 24 48 72 and 96 font characters These font characters are stored in a file called ASCFONT 24 Using the EasyASCIIFontMaker The following illustration shows the ASCIIFontMaker application screen with the ASCFONT 16 file opened Ascfont 15 EasyAsciiFontMaker of x Fite View Help eefe mf mmj b For Help press F1 NUM 4 To modify a font file 1 Start the EasyASCIIFontMaker application f You must close the EasyBuilder application before you can modify a font file Click Open from the File menu Open the font file you wish to modify Click Edit from the View menu to place the application into edit mode Click Toggle from the View menu to be able to modify a character Click the particular character that you wish to modify Click on any square with the character block to draw Clicking the same square again while in Toggle mode will clear the square Oy OB DBS 1010 1001a Rev 02 38 de 8 Silver Series Installation 8 Operation Manual Right click to Copy Paste or Clear a character After you are satisfied with the changes made click Save from the File menu It is generally good practice to copy the font files to backup files before you make any changes so that you can restore them later if necessary The table below describes the use for each icon on the toolbar
193. filter to the power supply should be kept as short as possible to minimize any additional noise pickup The case of the power line filter should be connected to a quiet earth ground The power line filter should have a current rating of at least 3 Amps with common mode and differential mode attenuation Do not use the power supply used to provide power to the OIT to power switching relays solenoids or other active devices Power Quiet Supply ground Keep short lt gt Green 110Vac neutral Black to 110Vac load hot Power Line Filter Connection Cable Routing and Noise Immunity Follow these guidelines when routing cable to the OIT e Always route the OIT communication cable and the power cable away from any AC voltage or rapidly switching DC control lines e Never bundle the OIT cables together with 120VAC power wires or with relay wiring e Try to keep at least 8 inches 20 cm of separation between the OIT cables and other power wiring If voltages greater than 120VAC are used in the system greater separation is required e Ifthe OIT cables must come near AC wiring make sure they cross at 90 degrees e Run AC power wires in a separate grounded conduit to reduce electrical noise interference e Keep the cable lengths for the OIT as short as possible Do not coil excess cable and place it next to AC powered equipment e Cover any equipment used in the enclosure that operates
194. future use The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9060 Keypad Control Al or NI located RdOnl ASCII Input Object located on the left side of the keypad The on left side of keypad window y OIT clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys Note this bit can be used to control Keypad popup Keypad Control Al or NI located 9061 on left side of keypad window RdOnly Same as LB9060 The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9062 Keypad Control AI or NI located RdOnl ASCII Input Object located on the left side of the keypad on the on left top side of keypad window y top half The OIT clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys i The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9063 SSL ror oeaan RdOnl ASCII Input Object located on the left side of the keypad on the window yp y bottom half The OIT clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9064 Keypad Control A or NI located RdOnly ASCII Input Object located on the right side of the keypad The 9 yp OIT clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys Keypad Control Al or NI located 9065 on right side of keypad window RdOnly Same as LB9064 The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9066 ei e o si a hie RdOnl ASCII Input Object located on the right side of the keypad on the Rado p yp y top half The OIT clear
195. g position that the window goes to when it is initially called onto the OIT screen The starting position is labeled Start Pos in the Window Setting Dialog box The X and Y positions refer to the pixel location of the OIT display at which the upper left hand corner of the window is to be displayed The default setting is X 0 and Y 0 which is the upper left hand corner of the OIT display The X axis refers to the horizontal location and the Y axis refers to the vertical location The HMI520C has a 320 x 240 HMI520T is 320 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 83 x 234 pixel display so the ranges are X 0 319 and Y 0 239 The HMI530 550 has a 640 x 480 pixel display so the ranges are X 0 639 and Y 0 479 X 326 Y 6 Full Screen Window Xx 100 Position X 0 1 240 X 320 Y 240 Assigning Size of Window You can vary the size of a new window to create full screen or popup windows Popup windows are most often used to display data that does not need to be on the OIT display all the time For example you might want to configure a numeric keypad in one popup window that can be minimized to an icon when not needed To use the numeric keypad just maximize the popup window The allowable range for the width is 100 320 640 for the HMI530 550 pixels The allowable range for the height is 100 240 234 for the HMI520T 480 for the HMI530 550 pixels Window Styles There are several options that can be assigned to each window created that a
196. ge 9006 Message Board Operation Mode RdOnly Board O open 1 brush 2 clipping 9007 Message Board Pen Width RdOnly o the current pent width in pixels of the 9008 Message Board Pen Color RdOnly la the current pen color 0 255 of the 9009 Reserved for future use When the local Word Option is selected for RTC source in the Edit System Parameters General settings dialog box of 9010 Local second bcd 0 59 R W EasyBuilder this is the location of the seconds parameter Use the Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC RTC seconds value to this register When the local Word Option is selected for RTC source in the Edit System Parameters General settings dialog box of 9011 Local minute bcd 0 59 R W EasyBuilder this is the location of the minutes parameter Use the Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC RTC minutes value to this register When the local Word Option is selected for RTC source in the Edit System Parameters General settings dialog box of 9012 Local hour bcd 0 23 R W EasyBuilder this is the location of the hours parameter Use the Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC RTC hours value to this register When the local Word Option is selected for RTC source in the Edit System Parameters General settings dialog box of 9013 Local date bcd 0 31 R W EasyBuilder this is the location of the date parameter Use the Data Transfer Object to copy the PLC RTC date value to this register When the local Word Option is selected for RTC source in the
197. ght the group object by clicking the mouse and dragging a rectangular outline so that it covers the entire group When you are done you should see small black squares around the perimeter of the group For this example the scale meter shown at the beginning of this section is highlighted From the Library menu click Group then Save to library Or click the Save to Group Library icon in the Standard toolbar The Save to Library dialog box appears Save to Library x Group library TS Description Group No o DI or En Cancel Click the Group library box and select the library you wish to store the group in for this example meters Click the Group No pull down box to select the location 0 to store the group Note that the Group No will automatically change to 0 first group not used Enter a title for the new group in the Description box ex Scale1 1010 1001a Rev 02 150 6 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Click OK The Group Library dialog box appears with the group stored in the library Group Library Lx e Pa 0 scale fi 2 3 SEE OCI 4 5 6 fe Library Name Select Lib New Lib Place Unattach Lib Delete 7 8 9 Notice that any shape or bitmap libraries used to create the group object are listed for your reference in the Including library box Click Close to return
198. gister that is used by the PLC to request a new window Some objects can display a graphics shape on the OIT screen and perform some action For example a Toggle Switch Object creates a graphic object on the OIT that when pressed activates a bit in the PLC Graphics Object A graphics object is any text icon or picture that can be displayed on the OIT Graphics objects are further defined by how they are composed or created A Text Object is a graphics object that displays text on the OIT screen A Bitmap Objectis a graphics object that displays a bitmap on the OIT screen Bitmaps are files stored in the OIT to display pictures A Shape Object is a graphics object that displays a shape on the OIT screen Shapes are also files stored in the OIT to display pictures Shapes differ from bitmaps in that shapes are stored using a vector based file format whereas bitmaps use a pixel based file format Each format has its advantages and disadvantages We will not go into any more detail about bitmap objects and shape objects until later in this manual For now think of them as objects used to display pictures on the OIT screen Finally a Group Object is the most complex type of graphics object It is a combination of other objects Briefly a group object consists of one or more objects that are grouped together and stored as one object A good example is a keypad which is really a combination of several keys each designed to perform a specific task Whe
199. h Product in full satisfaction of its warranty obligation Maximum liability of Maple Systems is the cost of the Product Information furnished by Maple Systems Inc is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by Maple Systems for the use of this information nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Maple Systems Inc Maple Systems retains the right to revise or change its products and documentation at any time without notice IF SERVICE IS REQUIRED Package the unit in its original packaging container or if unavailable any suitable rigid container If a substitute container is used surround the unit with shock absorbing material damage in shipment is not covered by the warranty Include a letter with the unit describing the difficulty and designating a contact person Send to the following address Maple Systems Inc 808 134 Street SW Suite 120 Everett WA 98204 7333 Only Products that have been issued a Return Material Authorization RMA number from Maple Systems may be returned All RMAs must be accompanied with a written purchase order for tracking purposes or in the case of out of warranty repairs for repair charges on a time and material basis All returns will be tested to verify customer claims of noncompliance with the product warranty Improper ret
200. h will be executed 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 255 Format Examples For n 100 Down 0 Step 3 nen 2 Next n For counter start To Down end Step steps Statements Next counter For loop 0 To 20 Step 2 loop loop 1 2 Next loop While Wend statement Loop an unknown number of times Looping is controlled by the Condition When Condition is TRUE the statements will be executed repetitively until the condition turns to FALSE Condition Necessary An expression which evaluates to TRUE or FALSE Statements Optional Statement block break Used in looping control or select statement It skips immediately to the end of the statement continue Used in looping control statement It quits the current iteration of a loop and starts the next one return Returns to the function or module that called the current function Format While Condition Statements Wend Examples For n 100 Down 0 Step 3 nen 2 Next n For loop 0 To 20 Step 2 loop loop 1 2 Next loop Boolean expressions The value of Boolean expression is zero means FALSE The value of Boolean expression is not zero means TRUE Function calls and passing parameters A sub function must be defined before its execution and is therefore placed before the main macro function If there is an entry attempt into a function before it is first defined i
201. hape stored in the library To change the shape you must delete the shape and store any changes you make to a new shape 1010 1001a Rev 02 142 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Using Bitmap Libraries EasyBuilder includes six bitmap libraries that contain bitmaps you can select from e switchl blb buttons lamps e bmpl blb miscellaneous icons blb miscellaneous e pipline blb pipes e pictures blb various pictures e symboll blb symbols To display the Bitmap Library dialog box bf 1 From the Library menu click Bitmap then click Call up library Or click the Call up Bitmap Library icon from the Standard toolbar The Bitmap Library dialog box appears Bitmap Library X Bitmap library SA gt State 0 UOVA Bitmap name 0 SYS Button 1 SYS Button 2 SYS Button 3 SYS Button Total states pa Compressed O O O O Image size 0 0 0 0 Background Gr Frame Gd Select Lib Unattach Lib The Bitmap Library provides several options which are discussed in the following sections Accessing and Creating Bitmap Libraries You can open close or even create new bitmap libraries easily using the Bitmap Library dialog box To open other bitmap libraries 1 With the Bitmap Library dialog box displayed click Select Lib The Open dialog box appears 2 Select which library you would like to open then click Open The Bitmap Library dialog box reappears with the selected
202. hapter 8 Representing 1010 1001a Rev 02 Data with Graphics Objects if necessary for more information on how to use the Set Bit part Tab Attribute Setting Write Address LBO to LB4 General Style Momentary Library button1 Shape Item 0 Attribute Color Select color Align Left Font 16 Label State 0 Content Alm 0 to Alm 4 Use Label checked Tracking checked Capturing Alarms and Events Profile Width 46 Height 27 3 Place the five objects on the top of the window 4 These buttons will be used to simulate alarm conditions gt Create a text box and two Set Word objects to scroll event window 1 Create a Text Object that says Alarm History 2 Create a Set Word Object with the following attributes Tab Attribute Setting Write Address LWO BIN Attribute Style Sub value JOG General Attribute Dec Value 1 Attribute Bottom 0 Limit Library button4 Shape Item 28 Label Use Label not checked Width 41 Profile Height 20 3 Create another Set Word Object with the following attributes Tab Attribute Setting Write Address LWO BIN Attribute Style Add value JOG General Attribute Inc Value 1 Attribute Upper Limit 10 Library button4 Shape Item 32 Label Use Label not checked Width 41 Profile Height 20
203. he Change Window function 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 93 Calling a popup window If a function key object is created to call a popup window the window that is displayed is generally overlaid over all other windows that are on display Therefore think of calling a popup window as opening another active window for display Note that the maximum number of popup windows displayed at any one time is six gt To calla popup window using a function key object From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears 2 Inthe General Tab click Popup Window In the same frame enter the Window No you want to call In the Shape tab click on the shape or bitmap checkbox then click on the Shape library or Bitmap library Select the shape or bitmap you wish to use to represent the function key 5 Inthe Label tab select a label for the function key 6 Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder 7 Place the function key object where you want it on the window you are editing Aw You must select a window that is less than full size when using the Popup Window function To display a full screen or popup window press the touch screen where the function key object is located The window displays in the location on the OIT display as determined by the X and Y position in the Window Settings box for that window For more information on using the Function Key object see the chapter
204. he Draw toolbar Move the line to the preferred location 8 To change any of the attributes double click on the line to display the Line Object s Attribute dialog box The Rectangle Tool The rectangle tool is used to create rectangles or squares Each rectangle created has four parameters associated with it size thickness color and filled gt To create a rectangle al 1 From the Draw menu click Rectangle or click the Rectangle icon in the Draw toolbar The Attributes dialog box appears 2 Ifthe interior of the rectangle is to be filled with a color check the Filled box Two additional settings appear 3 If you want to fill the rectangle with a solid color then select a color for the Interior box Click Pattern Style to display the Pattern Style dialog box Select the upper left most pattern for a solid color If you want to use a pattern for the filled section of the rectangle 1010 1001a Rev 02 126 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual then select from the available patterns and click OK to exit the Pattern Style dialog box In the Attributes dialog box select the Pattern color In the Frame section click the pull down arrow of the Color box and select a color Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box Click on the line thickness that you want to use Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are currently editing The mous
205. he OIT to the same panel cutout when a NEMA 4 seal is required For best results also replace the gasket itself Configuration Wiring The OIT must be configured for a particular protocol before use The EZware 500 software used on a PC with Windows 95 or higher is used for configuring the OIT For detailed instructions on installing and using the software please refer to the software documentation section of this manual 1010 1001a Rev 02 Installation of OITs 15 Connect the OIT to the PC for Configuration To configure the OIT using Maple System s configuration software you will need the OIT Configuration Y adapter Cable Maple P N 7431 0098 Connect the end marked OIT into Port 2 on the OIT marked PLC RS 485 PC RS 232 and connect the end marked PC into the proper COM port on your PC The end marked PLC is not used here See the figure below for serial port pin assignments and the next two figures for connecting the Silver series to a PC Many PCs no longer support RS232 serial ports If our PC has a USB port then you can download projects using a USB to serial adapter available at your local electronics store Factory Configuration Each OIT arrives from the factory with a demo project file that illustrates some of the most popular features of the OIT Please follow the directions enclosed in Chapter 2 Creating Your First Project to configure your OIT for the PLC that you are using Each OIT has a
206. he bitmap transparent If the color is configured as transparent then when the bitmap is placed on a window all areas of the bitmap with the transparent color will not be shown This is very useful when you want to overlap several bitmaps for example when configuring a bar graph To use the transparent feature click on the bitmap picture in the Get Bitmap Graphics dialog box on the color that is to be transparent The three boxes to the right of the Transparent checkbox will show the red green and blue mixture of the color and the fourth box actually shows the color Then check the Transparent checkbox 12 If you are creating a multi state bitmap then click Next to select the next bitmap picture for 1010 1001a Rev 02 146 Bitmap Library Bitmap library State fo x ECC a E CS ajs lu Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual the other states When the last state is completed then click Finished The Bitmap Library dialog box reappears with the bitmap listed x Bitmap name 0 SYS Button 1 SYS Button 2 SYS Button 3 SYS Button Total states Compressed Image size 0 0 0 0 Background E____ Frame w J Select Lib New Lib Unattach Lib Add Bitmap Delete Bitmap Export 13 14 15 De E n E n n You have the option of selecting Compressed format for any of the bitmaps in a library The compressed option decreases the size of the bitmap t
207. he starting RW address in which Eventlog data is stored When the memory is full new Eventlog data is written to this address overwriting the existing data e System Parameter Enables storing of System Parameters in part of the recipe module s non volatile storage Data from the General PLC and Security tabs of the System Parameters dialog can be stored When this feature is enabled the OIT reads the data from the non volatile memory when the OIT is powered up or reset At runtime any of these parameters can be modified with standard objects that write data to the appropriate recipe address The new values take effect when the OIT is reset 1010 1001a Rev 02 68 Aux Settings Configuration The Aux tab is used to configure the Aux port System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux Aux type Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual AA v Aux I F port S232 Data bits Stop bits 7 Bits 1 Bit Parameter 1 EN Parameter 3 Parameter 5 Aux station Aux timeout constant Aux block pack Baud rate Parity Parameter 2 Parameter 4 Parameter 6 For more information on this feature see Using the Aux Port at the end of this chapter PLC Block Pack This feature allows the OIT programmer
208. hen the middle rectangle finally the right rectangle See what happens when the make same width command is applied to the center and right rectangles 1010 1001a Rev 02 56 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt The make same height 7 command 1 Select the objects you wish to make the same height For this example select the left and center rectangle objects of Window_12 2 From the Edit menu click Make Same Size then Height or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size EasyBuilder always uses the height of the last object that was created as the basis for the height In this example the left rectangle was created first then the middle rectangle finally the right rectangle See what happens when the make same height command is applied to the center and right rectangles gt The make same size EJ command 1 Select the objects you wish to make the same size For this example select the left and center rectangle objects of Window_ 12 2 From the Edit menu click Make Same Size then Both or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size 5 E EasyBuilder always uses the size of the last object that was created as the basis for the size In this example the left rectangle was created first then the middle rectangle 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 57 finally the right rectangle See what happens when the
209. hereby reducing the memory requirements of the OIT to store that bitmap However because it is compressed the OIT will require slightly more processing time to display the bitmap Speed is sacrificed for memory We recommend that you do not use the compression option except in cases where you are reaching the maximum limits of storage capability of the OIT Click OK to return to Create Bitmap Object Click OK again to return to the main screen of FasyBuilder Place the bitmap object somewhere in the work area From the File menu click Save to permanently save the bitmap to the library z When adding new bitmaps to existing libraries that come with the EZware 500 software remember that any future upgrade that you receive from Maple Systems may overwrite existing libraries during installation This will delete any new bitmaps that you have entered Therefore we recommend that you create new libraries to store these bitmaps or make backup files of the libraries before installing new upgrades If you find that some of the bitmaps included in the libraries are not useful you have the option of deleting them so that they may be replaced by another bitmap gt To delete a bitmap from a library I Hi U N 1010 1001a Rev 02 From the Library menu click Bitmap then Call up library The Bitmap Library dialog box appears Select the library that the bitmap is located in Click on the bitmap that you wish to delete from the library
210. hest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range PREDA 32766 to 32767 Scaling low This is the low scaled value Scaling high This is the high scaled value Reads two 16 bit registers Register 1 determines the state of the shape displayed Register 2 determines the position of the shape along the X axis The OIT places the shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position For example if Input low 0 Input high 10 Scaling low 0 and Scaling high 100 then when the value in the PLC register increases by 1 the shape moves eft along the X axis by 10 pixels Maris wireverse No of states Range 1 to 32 scaling Input low This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range pus ow 32767 to 32766 Input high This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range put nign 32766 to 32767 Scaling low This is the low scaled value Scaling high This is the high scaled value 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 197 Reads two 16 bit registers Register 1 determines the state of the shape displayed Register 2 determines the position of the shape along the Y axis The OIT places the shape relative to the starting location using scaling to calculate position For example if Input low 0 Input high 10 Scaling low 0 and Scaling high 100 then when the value in the PLC register increases by 1 the shape moves up along
211. ice Address for the actual PLC address you wish to monitor Select either BIN binary or BCD format Click OK to return to the PLC Control Object dialog box You should see a new entry which lists the PLC address that is monitored by the OIT SS ore oa D The PLC can now signal the OIT to print a report A report is a pre configured screen in the OIT When the OIT reads the PLC Control Object Report Printout PLC address it will do the following e Determine if the screen requested is valid e If valid it will update all data registers that are on the screen e Then the OIT will send a copy of the screen to the printer The screen does not have to be showing on the OIT display 1010 1001a Rev 02 264 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 1010 1001a Rev 01 Index Index A Alarm Bar Object using 230 Alarm Display Object using 226 Alarm History creating 236 Alarm Indicator 66 121 Alarm Scan Object using 225 Alarms creating 0 225 Alarms scrollable window 228 align bottom i sa eee ee e ha Re 55 align horizontal cente 55 almidones vk ede REDS RS 53 all TOO a 2444 Aw ea ee Se a 54 E ug onda e Ee SEAS 54 align vertical Center 56 Alignment tools 0 53 Always ON bits 166 Animation Object using 199 Arc tool using 2 00 128 ASCII Data Object using 19
212. ide the master OIT The slave OITs can then access the PLC data by using the Ms_LW and Ms LB registers The biggest bottleneck in communications is trying to get all of the needed data from the PLC By doing this you greatly reduce the amount of time required to get the information from the PLC Connecting Multiple OITs Using the Ethernet Port The Silver Series Enhanced OITs are equipped with Ethernet ports One or several OITs can be connected to a PLC that uses the Modbus TCP IP protocol A single OIT may be directly connected to the PLC Ethernet port via a crossover Ethernet cable or multiple Master OITs may be connected to a PLC using an Ethernet switch and standard Ethernet cabling Each slave OIT can communicate through the master OIT to get data from Master OIT local memory and the PLC No additional communications modules other than possible network infrastructure such as routers hubs and switches are required providing an effective an inexpensive way to connect multiple OITs to a single PLC The PLC must use a Modbus TCP IP protocol driver if it is to be connected to the OIT Ethernet port Support for other Ethernet protocol drivers are available in our Silver Series Plus products Please consult our website for more information on these products Hardware Connections There are several wiring scenarios for connecting OIT touchscreens to a PLC Most depend upon individual needs The simplest connection with example network IP addresse
213. ill have to 1010 1001a Rev 02 Simulator Mode 33 be changed Refer to the figures on the previous pages for information on power connections and OIT serial connector pinouts OIT PLC communication cable Ha Gu Jit Maple Systems OIT programming cable P N 7431 0098 O 00 2 2 5 lg HMIS20C amp HMI I Tp Cad gt 520H models only E 100 666 af dr E eoii mouse is using sa PC 4 Com 1 use Com2 is E En HMI520 tet Let Let on STI m SLY Com2 Coml LI o A o o gd MP LP Printer OIT Power Supply Output Shielded Power Cable Power connector O Maple P N 6030 0009 DC Output V 24V DC Output V Gnd SF LFG O Connecting the HMI520 to a PC and a PLC 1010 1001a Rev 02 34 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual OIT Power Supply HMI53 0 550 Port 2 PLC RS 485 PC RS 232 Cr Printer If mouse is using Com 1 use Com2 OL Maple Systems OIT Ul programming cable P N 7431 0098
214. ill interpret the X Distance setting as the distance from the right side of one object to the left side of the next object The Y Distance setting is the distance from the bottom of one object to the top of the next object RGT vs BTM This setting determines in what order each new copy is made This will affect how the automatic PLC memory addressing is created for each object The RGT right option creates copies along the X axis first from left to right then along the Y axis from top to bottom The BTM bottom option creates copies along the Y axis first then the X axis X Distance Y Distance These settings determine the spacing in pixels between objects Quantity X Quantity Y These settings determine the number of copies to be made along the X axis horizontal and the Y axis vertical Adjust Distance This is the offset used when assigning a new PLC memory coil address to each new copy For example if 1 is selected then EasyBuilder will add one to the PLC memory coil address for each new copy made Using the Window Copy command The Window Copy command is used to copy a window from an existing project into the project that you are currently editing This feature reduces time spent creating new projects since you can now use windows that you created for other similar projects 1 From the Edit menu select Window Copy The Window Copy dialog box appears 2 Inthe Source Project box specify the path to the proje
215. ilt in numeric keypad creating the data registers setting up the common windows and saving compiling and simulating the keypad gt To create the Data Registers 1 Select Parts Numeric Input Extend from the menu listings This displays the Create Numeric Input Extend Object dialog box Create Numeric Input Extend Object casina ur vali General Numeric Shape Font Description Read address Device type LW v Device address 5 BIN v No of words 1 Trigger address s r Device type LB vi Device address 9000 2 Enter the following settings In the Read Address section e Device Type LW e Device Address 5 e No of Words 1 1010 1001a Rev 02 208 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual e Inthe Trigger Address section Device Type LB Device Address 9000 3 Select the Numeric tab Create Numeric Input Extend Object General Numeric Shape Font Display Decimal Hex O Binary Mask O Single float Double float Raw data display Do conversion Numeric No above Dec 4 No below Dec Input low lo i Input high E r 4 Inthe Display section select the Decimal option button 5 Click OK 6 Use the mouse cursor to place the Numeric Input register in the center of the screen of Window 10 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using and Crea
216. in Window_12 is such an example This meter is actually composed of three separate objects a rectangle a scale a meter display These objects are then overlaid to represent the scale Grouping the three objects together makes it easier to move or copy the scale meter Instead of copying each separate object the scale meter can be assigned as a group then copied as though it were one object To group objects ti 1 Select the objects to be grouped 2 From the Edit menu click Group or click the Group icon from the Manager toolbar 3 All objects within the group can now be copied deleted or moved by clicking on the group 1010 1001a Rev 02 50 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual To ungroup objects Tr 1 Select the objects to be ungrouped 2 From the Edit menu click UnGroup or click the UnGroup icon from the Manager toolbar 3 All objects within the group can now be copied deleted or moved separately Layering Objects Graphics objects can be overlaid upon each other When layered the graphics object on the topmost layer will be completely seen How much of the other graphics objects are seen depends on what is on top of them The following layer commands help to position the overlaid objects exactly how you want them To better illustrate how layering works we will use a rectangle object a circle object and an arc object that are overlaid on each other in Window_ 12 of the sample project La
217. ine Simulation leave unchecked Click the Online Simulator The Open Project dialog box appears Click on the compiled project file that you wish to simulate Click Open The simulation screen should appear To end on line simulation press the Space bar or right click in the simulation screen and click Exit A Oye 2 Online simulation with RS232 is not available for the HMIS04T Troubleshooting Tools During Simulation Simulation mode allows additional functionality By placing the mouse anywhere on the simulation screen and doing a right click a new menu comes up with additional features Search Allows searching the entire project for a particular PLC address To search check the PLC and then type the address Searching can also be done by parts Check Part and select the type of object PLC Monitor Allows monitoring of the polling communication between the OIT and the PLC This monitor can help troubleshoot register fault problems To view each time the OIT polls the PLC and grabs a single or a block of registers click on the Block Capture Each poll communicates the following information e The window from which the register or block of registers is called Win000 are background tasks such as alarm scan objects e Time it took to get the data e Register address e Number of 16 bit words it grabbed e Register type If Block Capture fails to retrieve the data the message FAIL will appear to the right System Resourc
218. ing Rather than waste time recreating this scale meter for each new application it would be much easier to store the meter into a group library EasyBuilder includes one group library keypad glb that contains sample keypads you can select from When a new project is started the keypad group library is automatically open To display the Group Library dialog box E 1 From the Library menu click Group then click Call up library Or click the Call up Group Library icon from the Standard toolbar The Group Library dialog box appears 1010 1001a Rev 02 148 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Let s look at the Group Library dialog box Group Library EW Library Name keypad Including library Shape button Bitmap Select Lib F New Lib Place Unattach Lib Close Delete The Group Library provides several options which are discussed in the following sections Accessing and Creating Group Libraries Group libraries can be opened and closed easily using the Group Library dialog box It is even possible to create new group libraries To open other group libraries 1 With the Group Library dialog box displayed click Select Lib The Open dialog box appears 2 Select which library you would like to open then click Open The Group Library dialog box reappears with the selected library displayed If the project has ten libraries open
219. irst Project 23 12 On the main screen of EasyBuilder you should see the rectangle that you just created move and or change size This rectangle is used as a backdrop to the scale meter gt To create scale lines on Window 11 From the Draw menu click Scale Click on an area somewhere inside Window 11 Create a scale shape by moving the mouse cursor Click again to permanently create the scale lines From the Edit menu click Select Double click somewhere on the scale lines The Scale Object s Attribute dialog box appears In the Scale Style box click Up Type 10 in the Division box Type 8 in the Meter length box Click on the Profile tab Enter 51 for the X position Enter 16 for the Y position Enter 56 for the Width Enter 28 for the Height Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you should see the scale that you just created move and or change size This scale should be enclosed by the rectangle gt To create a meter display on Window 11 1 SU Gee be 10 11 12 From the Parts menu click Meter Display The Create Meter Display Object dialog box appears Type Meter Display in the Description box Click the Meter Display tab In the Style 2 Indicator box click Up half In the Value Span box enter 100 Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you will see a white square outline that is attached to your cursor in the work area This represents the meter display just crea
220. isplays ASCII characters stored in a PLC register Characters can be changed using an alphanumeric keypad ASCII Data Displays ASCII characters stored in a PLC register Moving Shapes Creates a multi state graphics object which changes state picture and position on the screen according to a value in a PLC register Animation Creates a multi state graphics object which changes state picture on the screen according to a value in a PLC register The positions on the screen are predefined tiles E e u pt Indirect Window Configures the OIT to monitor PLC data registers or coils to display for a specific window popup by a PLC word address if Direct Window Displays a Window based on a bit in a PLC Register Alarm Displays Creates alarms to display alarms sent from the Alarm Scan Object BE E Trend Displays Creates a trend graph Samples data in a single or multiple 16 bit PLC register and plots the data on a time graph Bar Graph Displays Creates a bar graph with alarm monitoring 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Meter Displays Creates a scale meter Alarm Bar Displays alarms detected by the Alarm Scan Object on a single horizontal scrolling line Recipe Transfer Transfers data to the specified PLC registers Note Recipes are not supported by the HMI504T Event Displays
221. ister is also the starting register used for the OIT s RWI Indexed Address Recipe Word data register 4 Inthe Attribute frame for the Direction setting click Download or Save Use the Download setting to send data stored in the OIT s RWI data registers to the specified PLC registers Use the Save setting to retrieve data stored in PLC registers to be stored in the OIT s RWI data registers 1010 1001a Rev 02 242 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 5 Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form Create Recipe Transfer Object 6 Select either a shape or bitmap to represent the Recipe Transfer object If you need more information on how to do this refer to Chapter 6 Creating Graphics Objects 7 Click the Label tab to display the Label form J r Attribute Color han V Use label Use Label Library Duplicate this label to other states 1010 1001a Rev 02 Data and Recipe Transfer Objects 243 8 Click the Use Label checkbox if you want to use a label 9 You can have a different label for each state of the Bit Lamp In the State box enter the state that you wish to edit then enter the label for that state in the Content box Do the same for other states Click the Duplicate this label to other states button if you want to use the same label for all states 10 Enter the color that you want for the label in the Color box You can select a differen
222. it may be a local bit LB or it may be a PLC bit Each macro created will have a unique name and bit When a specified bit is set high so it executes a specific macro the macro will be entered into and its variables initialized The macro will run its sequence of events and will exit when finished The bit that called the macro into execution should be cleared by the macro before it exits otherwise the macro will immediately be entered again upon exit If this immediate re entry should happen this could form an endless loop and will certainly cause a taxing of the CPU time and cause slow screen refreshing and communications A sample macro is listed below which reads two local word registers and adds them together and stores them into another register location Macro Command main short numl short num2 short result bool AllDone 0 GetData numl LW Binplc 0 1 get two registers to add LW 0 amp LW 1 GetData num2 LW Binplc 1 1 result numl num2 add the two registers SetData result LW Binplc 2 1 store the result LW 2 1010 1001a Rev 02 246 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual SetData AllDone LB Binplc 1 1 done with the macro clear the bit that called it LB 1 End Macro Command The macro was named AddTwo and the bit that executed this macro was LB 1 After the macro was written a PLC Control Object was added where the Type of con
223. ithout using the OIT Click Offline Simulator to open a compiled project file eob in off line simulator mode See the chapter Simulator Mode for more information Click Download to send a compiled project file stored on the computer to the OIT Click Upload to receive a compiled project file from the OIT to be stored in the computer Files uploaded from the OIT are eob files These need to be decompiled before they can be modified by the EasyBuilder software To decompile go to the Tools menu and select Decompile Browse for your file and then press the Decompile button This will create a epj file which can be opened and modified in EasyBuilder If the project was created in a version of EasyBuilder prior to v 2 0 it will not decompile Click Jump To RDS to place the OIT in Remote Debug Simulation mode This mode is used only when you need to update the Boot ROM Click Jump To Application to place the OIT in normal application mode This command must be sent to the OIT to get the OIT to execute the project file that is stored inside of it Click Jump To Touch Adjust to calibrate your touch screen The OIT displays a crosshair cursor and you are asked to touch the crosshair cursor for e the top left position e the top right position e the bottom left position e the bottom right position Two rectangle objects then appear on the OIT screen To determine if the touch screen is properly calib
224. itmaps with active graphics objects is covered in Chapter 8 Representing Data with Graphics Objects Information on creating new shapes and bitmaps and storing them in libraries will be covered in a later section of this chapter Using a Predefined Shape You can select from many shapes that are included in the EasyBuilder configuration software Shapes can be used for active or passive objects The following procedure describes using a passive shape object gt Tousea shape 1 From the Draw menu click Shape Or click the Shape icon in the Draw toolbar The Create Shape Object dialog box appears Create Shape Object x Shape Shape Shape library State fo y OK Cancel Apply Help 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 131 2 Click the Shape library button The Shape Library dialog box appears xi Shape library TT State 0 gt ILL 0 Untitled 1 Untitled 2 Untitled 3 Untitled ant 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled Background EJE Frame Ez M Select Lib New Lib Unattach Lib Delete Shape Place Click the pull down box of Shape library and choose from one of the open libraries of shapes Use the scroll bar to view available shapes Click on the shape that you want Click OK The Create Shape Object dialog box reappears The shape that you selected should be displayed in this dialog box Click OK The
225. ject from the Compact Flash Card and automatically reboot to application mode Dip Switch 2 on the back of the OIT should be moved back to the Off position after the project has downloaded Connecting Multiple OITs to one PLC Most of the PLCs on the market communicate to OITs using a master slave format The PLC typically behaves as the slave responding to requests from the OIT for data and not initiating any communications Therefore the OIT must continuously poll the PLC for data needed Some of the PLC protocols do not allow multiple master devices OITs to connect to the PLC If you want to connect two or more OITs to a PLC you often need to purchase multiple communications modules for the PLC which can be very expensive To address this need the Silver Series has a built in feature which allows multiple OITs to connect together in a daisy chain fashion One of the OITs is designated as the master while the other OITs are defined as slaves The master OIT is directly connected to the PLC communications port Each slave OIT then communicates through the master OIT to get data from the PLC PLC 232 PC 232 PLC 232 HMIS00 HMIS00 HMI500 Master Slave 1 Slave 2 No additional communications modules are required This feature provides an effective and inexpensive way to connect multiple OITs to a single PLC Hardware Connection As stated above the OITs are connected in a daisy chain fashion using
226. ject or ASCII Input Object Note this key does not clear the actual target PLC register until the Enter key is pressed ESC Configures the Function Key as an Escape key When pressed it will exit the editing mode 4 Just below the four control key options is the ASCII checkbox Select this when you want to configure the Function Key to enter an alphanumeric character When this checkbox is selected the Character box is activated Use this box to enter the ASCII character you want to use 5 The Hard Copy checkbox is for a printer option which is not currently supported 6 Click the Shape tab to display the Shape form Create Function Key Object ere SAS ES 7 Select either a shape or bitmap to represent the Function Key object If you need more information on how to do this consult Chapter 6 Creating Graphics Objects 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using and Creating Keypads 203 8 Click the Label tab to display the Label form Create Function Key Object General Shape Label Content C Use label se Label Libra C Tracking Label Library Duplicate this label to other states Attribute Color i Align Left v 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Click the Use Label checkbox to use a label You can have a different label for each state of the Bit Lamp In the State box enter the state that you wish to edit then e
227. k with wire clamps Lugs are not required Connect the OIT to the PLC Each PLC supported by Maple Systems has its own wiring requirements Maple Systems offers OIT to PLC communication cables for most PLCs that are built to any length and tested for high reliability Most cables are available for next day shipment from Maple Systems Components and instructions necessary to construct your own OIT to PLC communications cables are also available Refer to Maple Systems Technical Note 1061 or visit our Web site 1010 1001a Rev 02 HMI520T 530T 550T HMI504T Port 1 Port 2 PLC RS 232 PLC RS485 PC RS232 Pin Function Function Function 1 Aux TXD RXD RXD 2 TXD RXD RXD 3 RXD TXD TXD 4 no connection TXD TXD 5 GND GND GND 6 Aux RXD no connection TXD PLC 7 no connection TXD TXD PC 8 no connection RXD RXD PC 9 no connection no connection RXD PLC Pinout for the OIT Ports Installation of OITs 13 Shielded Power Cable Control Maple P N 6030 0009 Panel Power Supply Printer port DC Output V 24V DC Output V Gnd FG Port 2 PLC RS 485 PC RS 232 has a shielded male DE9P connector Port 1 PLC RS 232 has a shielded female DESS connector HMI530 Power connector Printer Epson Compatible
228. ks as well as where it is located on the OIT screen depending upon the control of the PLC However the Animation Object moves along a predefined path that is determined when you create the part Because of this the Animation Object requires only two registers for changing state and X Y movement e the Animation object continuously reads a PLC register and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the number of states defined e the Animation object continuously reads a second PLC register to determine which position along the predefined path it should be As shown in the following example the part moves along a predefined track when the value in the second PLC register is incremented 1010 1001a Rev 02 198 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To create an Animation Object Tai 1 From the Parts menu click Animation Or click the Animation icon in the Part2 toolbar The mouse cursor changes from a pointer to a crosshair when placed over the work area of EasyBuilder Use the cursor to set the path that the Animation object is to take At each location along the path click the mouse to place another position marker A maximum of 255 position markers may be placed onto the window screen 2 When you have finished placing the position markers right click the mouse to display the part at the first position 1010 1001a Rev 02 Representing Data with Graphics Objects 199 3 Double click the
229. l 3 0 second y No of bits 0 3 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Data Transfer part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 4 Inthe Source address frame select the PLC coils or registers that are to be copied If the Address mode is Word then the No of words box is used to specify the total number of 16 bit registers to copy The range is to 16 5 Inthe Destination address frame select the PLC coils or registers that receive the data 6 Inthe Attribute frame for the Address mode setting click Word or Bit Use the Word setting for data transfer of 16 bit registers Use the Bit for data transfer of coils If Bit is selected enter the total number of bits that are to be transferred in the Number of bits box The range is 1 to 255 7 The Interval setting in the Attribute frame is used to select the period at which the data is transferred Select 0 for continuous data transfer Range is 0 to 25 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments Note that selecting a smaller period will decrease the amount of OIT processing time that can be allocated to other tasks 8 Click OK to close the Data Transfer Object s Attributes dialog box The Data Transfer Object dialog box reappears with the new entry listed You can edit the attributes of an existing Data Transfer object by clicking on the Setting button Any entries can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button
230. l Shape Label Profile Description l gt Write address Device type LB v Device address fo T Aux T Tag M Attribute Style OFF y Cancel Apply Help 2 Check Tag Checkbox The Device Type list will be filled with a list of available tags Objects addressable as Register type objects will display Tags configured as Word Objects addressable as Bit type objects will display Tags configured as Bit Device type OUT_FLOW OUT FLOW 3 Select the desired Tag from the Device Type list to address the Object to the referenced Register Address Creating the Label Library The Label library is a database of text Labels for use with objects utilizing text labels descriptive of their status or condition Each label can consist of up to 32 unique text strings representing the maximum number of states available per object displayable in up to four separate languages 1010 1001a Rev 02 156 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual a 1 Fromthe Library menu click Label or click the callup label library icon from the standard toolbar The Label Library dialog box appears Comien Marche Parada Add Modi bere EPt CSV Fle Import CSV Fie Save Label Fie Load Label Fie 2 Create a label by opening the Label Library as detailed above and Clicking the Add button to display the Label dialog Label Name MAUNE No of State f1 RE Cance
231. lation mode from EasyBuilder 1 Ifthe project has been modified since the last time it was saved and compiled or if it has not yet been compiled it must be saved and compiled before the simulator can start 2 From the Tools menu click On line Simulation or click the On Line Simulation icon in the Standard toolbar 3 The Simulation Mode screen should appear 4 To end on line simulation press the Space bar or right click in the simulation screen and click Exit Simulation mode can also be started from EasyManager EasyManager requires only the compiled project file eob This can be useful in situations in which you want to demonstrate changes made to a project for a client without giving him access to your project file It also allows you to rapidly switch from simulating one project to another without having to open save and compile each project gt To use off line simulation mode from EasyManager 1 Start the EasyManager software Click Offline Simulator The Open Project box appears Click on the compiled project file that you wish to simulate Click Open The simulation screen should appear To end off line simulation press the Space bar or right click in the simulation screen and click Exit ne SD 1010 1001a Rev 02 Simulator Mode 31 gt To use on line simulation mode from EasyManager Start the EasyManager software 2 Ifusing Direct Online Simulation check the Direct Online Simulator box If using Normal Onl
232. ld be constant behind Case e 12 Missing Case behind Select e 13 Missing expression behind Select Case e 14 Missing End Select statement e 15 Illegal Case statement e 16 Unfinished Select statement before End Select The format of Select Case statement is Select Cas expression Case constant Case constant Case constant Case Else End Select Any format other than this format will cause compile error e 17 For statement error missing For before Next e 18 Should be integer of char variable e 19 Missing assign statement e 20 Missing keyword To e 21 Missing Next statement The format of For statement is For variable initial value To end value Step Next variable Any format other than this format will cause compile error e 22 While statement error missing While before Wend e 23 Missing Wend statement The format of While statement is While logic expression Wend Any format other than this format will cause compile error e 24 Illegal Break statement Break statement can only be used in For While or Select Case statement Break statement takes one line of Macro e 25 Illegal Continue statement Continue statement can
233. lick the Shape tab Click Use Shape Click on the Shape Library command Select Shape 0 from the button1 library Click OK to return to the Create Function Key Object dialog box 8 Click the Label tab Click the Use label checkbox 9 For our example type CFS11 meaning Change Fast Selection Window 11 into the Contents box Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box and go back to the EasyBuilder main screen 10 Place the new Function Key object somewhere on Window 10 11 Now create another Function Key object with the JOG FS attribute but select 4 for Window number 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 115 12 For the label enter CFS04 meaning Change Fast Selection Window 04 which is the default Fast Selection window 13 In the Edit System Parameters menu under the General tab section enable the task bar 14 Save compile and download the project to your OIT Below is an illustration of what the default fast selection window Window 11 alternate fast selection window and Window 10 startup window might look like A Alternate Fast Selection A Default Fast Selection Window Window 11 Startup Window 10 When the OIT initializes it displays the startup screen Window 10 and the task bar a dra E a UO Cup w A Window 10 1010 1001a Rev 02 116 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Press the Fast Selection key on the task bar to view the default Fast Selection windo
234. low Base Screen The base window is placed in front of the common window so the com mon window appears behind the base window e Above Base Screen The base window is placed behind the common window so the common window appears in the front of the base window Extra No of Events Specifies how many extra events may be placed in the Event Log beyond the default limit of 200 events For more information on the Event Log feature see Chapter 11 Capturing Alarms and Events RTC Source Selects whether the OIT Local Words or its own internal RTC are used for displaying time and date information The real time clock is battery backed with a rechargeable battery In the absence of power the battery will retain the clock settings for approximately six months The battery is automatically recharged whenever the OIT is operating and has a life of approximately five years e When Internal RTC is selected the time and date information is available to the OIT through certain reserved words in the OIT s recipe area These addresses can be read from or written to using any of the OIT objects that are word based such as Numeric Data Numeric Entry Word Lamp and Set Word Note that Data Type is BCD e When Local Word is selected use the Data Transfer Object to send the PLC s internal RTC to the OIT s Local Words For more information on the OIT s reserved Local Words see the section Using Internal Data Memory of OIT Print Allows configura
235. lso be configured For more information on the Fast Selection window consult Chapter 4 Creating Windows Alarm Bar Pixels per Scroll Selects the number of pixels that the text on the Alarm bar scrolls to the left on each scroll The speed of the scroll can also be controlled No of Windows Selects the maximum number of pop up windows that can be displayed simultaneously The default value is 6 The options are 2 6 Password Used to set the numeric password that prevents unauthorized uploading of a project To disable Password protection set the password to 0 This is the default value By using this feature the OIT programmer can prevent another person from using Ezware to upload a project that is stored in the OIT and download it to another OIT 1010 1001a Rev 02 62 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To Use Password Protection 1010 1001a Rev 02 1 2 Once the project is downloaded to the OIT the password becomes active When you try to upload the project from the OIT to your computer EasyManager will prompt you to enter a password Ifthe password is entered correctly then EasyManager uploads the project file If the password is incorrect then an error message appears and the upload process is halted Startup Window No Used to select which screen will be displayed when the OIT is powered up or reset The default setting is the initial window that is created with each new project Window 10 The
236. ly NA 4 digits are used for 16 bit 8 digits for 32 bit Input low 0 to 21474836474 This is a decimal number which the OIT converts to hexadecimal for establishing the lowest value that the OIT operator is allowed to enter For example if you want the minimum hex value to be 100n then you would enter value 256d Input high 0 to 21474836474 This is a decimal number which the OIT converts to hexadecimal for establishing the highest value that the OIT operator is allowed to enter For example if you want the maximum value to be 1000h then you would enter the value 4096d Binary No above Dec NA 16 digits are used for 16 bit 32 digits for 32 bit Input low 0 to 21474836474 This is a decimal number which the OIT converts to binary for establishing the lowest value that the OIT operator is allowed to enter For example if you want the minimum binary value to be 1001b then you would enter value 9d Input high 0 to 21474836474 This is a decimal number which the OIT converts to binary for establishing the highest value that the OIT operator is allowed to enter For example if you want the maximum binary value to be 10100101b then you would enter value 165d Mask No above Dec 1 10 The number of asterisks to display When OIT operator is entering a new number only asterisks are displayed as the number is entered Decimal format is used when Mask is select
237. m the Edit menu click Paste A copy of the function key appears in the upper left corner of the work area Deselect the function key by clicking on any blank space in the work area Double click on the second function key The Function Key s Object Attribute dialog box appears In the General tab section change the Description to Off Button Click on Change Window Enter 10 for Window number Click on the Label tab Type OFF in the Content box Click on the Profile tab Enter 196 for the X position Enter 168 for the Y position Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you should see the second function key that you just created move to the lower right hand side of the work area This function key is used to close Window 11 1010 1001a Rev 02 22 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual You have finished configuring your first window It should look something like the picture below This is the Startup Screen Creating a Popup Window We will configure Window 11 as a popup window Up to six popup windows can be displayed on a full screen window The windows may overlap each other or may be minimized to an icon This section will show how to create a scale and a numeric register that displays the current value of the scale You will also create an increment and decrement key to change the value in the scale meter gt To create Window 11 1 AOS 3 o go 10 From the Window menu click Ope
238. main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with an outline of the shape object in the upper left corner of the work area Move the shape to the location desired and click The shape appears with small square boxes around the perimeter of the shape The shape can be resized or you can edit the shape s parameters by double clicking to enter the Shape Object s Attribute dialog box Using a Predefined Bitmap You can select from many bitmaps that are included in the EasyBuilder configuration software Bitmaps can be used for active or passive objects The following procedure describes using a passive bitmap object 1010 1001a Rev 02 132 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt Tousea bitmap 1 From the Draw menu click Bitmap Or click the Bitmap icon in the Draw toolbar The Create Bitmap Object dialog box appears Create Bitmap Object 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 133 2 Click the Bitmap library button The Bitmap Library dialog box appears Bitmap Library Bitmap library FEME MC v State 0 o 1 2 3 4J 5 Bitmap name 0 SYS Button 1 SYS Button 2 SYS Button 3 SYS Button Total states ES Compressed O O O O Image size 0 0 0 TEO Background J Frame 38 3 Click the pull down box of Bitmap library and choose from one of the open libraries of bitmaps 4 Use the scroll bar to view available bitmaps Click on the bitmap that you wan
239. make same size command is applied to the center and right rectangles Alignment Nake Same Size Flipping Objects These three commands allow you to quickly flip or position an object in a new direction To better illustrate we will again refer to Window_ 12 of the sample project o Ebipping gt To flip vertically a 1 Select the object you wish to flip vertically For this example select the left triangle object of Window_12 2 From the Edit menu click Flip Vertical or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the left triangle object back in its original position gt To flip horizontally de 1 Select the object you wish to flip horizontally For this example select the right triangle object of Window_12 2 From the Edit menu click Flip Horizontal or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the right triangle object back in its original position 1010 1001a Rev 02 58 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt To rotate d 1 Select the object you wish to rotate For this example select the right triangle object of Window_ 12 2 From the Edit menu click Rotate 90 degrees or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar gt To Lock an Object sal Each object position and size can be locked by using the Pin button When the object is locked its position and size
240. mputers or when using a very long programming cable e Select Partial Download Upload The default setting is Complete Download Upload A complete download should be used whenever you receive a later version of EZware 500 or any Boot ROM updates It should also be used whenever you select a different PLC protocol driver However even with these improvements it may still take 1 2 minutes to download a project A better way of testing changes made to a project is to use the computer to simulate the operation of the OIT This chapter shows you how to dramatically save time when creating and testing a project by putting the computer into Simulation Mode In Simulation Mode the computer displays a screen that simulates what is seen when the OIT executes the project file You can use the mouse on your computer to simulate the operation of the touch screen on the OIT Rather than waiting two minutes to test each change you make to your project you can now instantly switch to Simulation Mode to see if your project is working as expected You can enter Simulation Mode in three ways Using the sample project that you created in the last chapter we will guide you through the three methods The Simulation Screen All modes of simulation use the same screen Startup Screen For our example we are showing the sample project as it would appear after the ON function key has been pressed When the Simulation Mode screen first appears it will always sh
241. n Window The Open Window dialog box appears Click New Window The Select Window Style dialog box appears Click Base Window The Window Setting dialog box appears Enter 79 for the X position Enter 58 for the Y position Enter 160 for the Width Enter 120 for the Height Click the pull down box from the Background Color box The Color dialog box appears Click on the white color box then click OK The color box should reflect the color that you have chosen Click OK Select Window_11 in the Open Window dialog box Click Open The main screen of EasyBuilder should reappear with Window 11 displayed in the work area gt To create a rectangle on Window 11 gt eee 10 11 1010 1001a Rev 02 From the Draw menu click Rectangle The Attributes dialog box appears Click on Interior Filled Click the pull down box from the Interior box The Color dialog box appears Click on the white color box then click OK The color in the Interior box should reflect the color that you have chosen Click on an area somewhere inside Window 11 Create a rectangular shape by moving the mouse cursor Click again to permanently create the rectangle From the Edit menu click Select Double click somewhere on the rectangle The Rectangle Object s Attribute dialog box appears Click the Profile tab Enter 48 for the X position Enter 13 for the Y position Enter 61 for the Width Enter 36 for the Height Click OK Creating Your F
242. n box The Pattern Style dialog box appears 11 Select the pattern you wish to use then click OK The Window Setting dialog box reappears 12 Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Window Setting dialog box Click Close to return to the EasyBuilder main screen Deleting a Window Before any window can be deleted from a project the window must be closed To close a window see the section earlier in this chapter on opening windows gt To delete a window 1 Fromthe Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears 2 Highlight the window that you wish to delete 3 Click the Delete command A dialog box appears asking if you want to delete this window 4 Click Yes The dialog box disappears and the selected window is deleted 5 Click Close in the Open Window dialog box to go back to the EasyBuilder main screen Using Base Windows Of the three types of windows base windows are the most commonly used A base window is used to create a full screen window or a popup partially sized window You may have up to six popup windows on the screen at any moment in time Base windows can be minimized to an icon on the task bar Base windows can also be moved about on the OIT display and can overlap each other The number of objects that can be placed onto each base window is limited only by the total amount of memory available within the OIT How to Display Base Windows Base windows can be displayed o
243. n box of JOG Delay and select 0 5 second Enter 100 in the Attribute Upper limit box Click the Shape tab Click Use shape then click Shape library The Shape Library dialog box appears Click Select Lib The Open dialog box appears Select button3 slb from the list of shape libraries Then click Open Click button3 in the Shape library box Scroll through the selections to selection 21 Click the shape then click OK The shape should appear in the Shape tab Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you will see a white square outline that is attached to your cursor in the work area This represents the increment key just created Click to place the increment key on Window 11 Double click on the increment key The Set Word Object s Attribute dialog box appears Click on the Profile tab Enter 19 for the X position Enter 74 for the Y position Enter 31 for the Width Enter 29 for the Height and click OK Creating Your First Project 25 19 On the main screen of EasyBuilder you should see the increment key that you just created move and or change size The increment key is now complete gt To create a decrement key on Window 11 1 As with the second function key of Window 10 we are going to create the decrement key by copying the increment key and then making changes to the attributes 2 Click the increment key to highlight it From the Edit menu click Copy 4 From the Edit menu click Paste
244. n grouped together a keypad can be stored as a group object for use in other projects or windows Windows A window is a screen that can be displayed on the OIT Windows can be full sized to completely cover the OIT display or partially sized Any partially sized window is usually referred to as a popup window Windows can appear on the OIT display by a request from the PLC or by a press from the touch screen Windows can be configured to any size Once a window is displayed 1t can be moved around the OIT display removed from the display or minimized to an icon Windows can even overlap each other Each window can display graphics objects and there is no limit to the number of graphics objects that can be placed on each window The Silver Series is capable of storing up to 1999 windows but the actual limit is determined by the total amount of memory used for the application A more in depth discussion of windows is covered in later chapters For now think of windows as screens that can be displayed on the OIT 1010 1001a Rev 02 4 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual What is a Silver Series OIT The Silver Series of OITs by Maple Systems are graphics operator interfaces designed to connect to PLCs in an industrial environment The displays are covered with a 4 wire analog resistive touch screen designed for harsh industrial environments The touch screen uses the latest in touch screen technology enabling the OIT programmer to cr
245. n of the ellipse then select from the available patterns and click OK to exit the Pattern Style dialog box In the Attributes dialog box select the Pattern color In the Frame section click the pull down arrow of the Color box and select a color Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box Click on the line thickness that you want to use Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are currently editing The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor Click to mark a corner of the ellipse Move the mouse to where the opposite corner of the ellipse should be Click the mouse cursor again to mark the ellipse The ellipse object is formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the perimeter of the ellipse To continue creating more ellipses repeat the last step To move the ellipse just created click on the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar Move the ellipse to the preferred location To change any of the attributes double click on the ellipse to display the Ellipse Object s Attribute dialog box The arc tool is used to create arcs Each arc created has three parameters associated with it size thickness and color gt To create an arc 1 1010 1001a Rev 02 Za 3 From the Draw menu click Are or click the Arc icon in the Draw toolbar The Attributes di
246. n the Function Key Object The PLC Control Object is global meaning it does not matter which windows are currently on display so the OIT will always monitor the PLC address that you have selected The Function Key Object can be made local to one or more windows by placing the object on only those windows It can also be made global meaning the OIT operator can always change to this window no matter which window is currently displayed by placing the Function Key Object on the Common Window or the Fast Selection Window in the Task Bar more about these later in this chapter If you want to display a popup window on one particular full screen window then try using the Popup Window option in the Function Key Object This is particularly useful if you want the OIT operator to control the ability to display the popup window If you want the PLC to determine when to display the popup window then try using the Direct Window object If you want to display a popup window that can be shown on any full screen window then try using the Popup Window option in the Function Key Object You should place the Function Key Object in the Fast Selection Window with the Task Bar enabled more information is available on the Task Bar later in this chapter This will allow the OIT operator access to that popup window regardless of which full screen window is displayed If you want to display the popup window only when some condition in the PLC has 1010 1001a Rev 02
247. n the OIT screen by using a function key to display the window or by using the PLC to call up the window Using a Function Key The Function Key Object is a graphics touch screen object that you place onto a window to perform an action Function keys have many purposes which are discussed in later sections but two actions that a function key can perform are e Calling a full screen window e Calling a popup window Calling a full screen window If a function key object is created to call a full screen window the window that is displayed replaces all other windows that are on display regardless of how many are open Therefore think of calling a full screen window as performing two actions closing any open windows and displaying a full screen window gt To call a full screen window using a function key object 1 From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears 2 Inthe General Tab click Change Window 3 Inthe same frame enter the Window No you want to call In the Shape tab click on the shape or bitmap checkbox and then click on the Shape library or Bitmap library Select the shape or bitmap you wish to use to represent the function key 5 Inthe Label tab select a label for the function key Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder 7 Place the function key object where you want it on the window you are editing D You must select a window that is full size when using t
248. n the macro program will create a compiler error Function not defined Sub int SOR int x number x x x return x This is the sub function that squares a 1010 1001a Rev 02 256 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual End Sub acro Command main This main function calls the SQR function int I 5 I SOR I SetData 1 LW Binplc 1 1 Write the result to a LW End Macro Command The above example code defines a sub function called SQR This sub function allows one variable to be passed into it The function then takes the value passed to it multiplies its value by itself and then stores the result back into the same variable The result is returned back to the calling function Reading amp Writing External Registers in a Macro A macro program can communicate with external PLC data registers and I O The function GetData receives data from the PLC or the OIT s local LW and LB memory The function SetData sends data to the PLC or the OIT s local LW and LB memory The GetData or the SetData can be hand typed according to the format listed below or the PlcCom button located at the bottom left of the macro editor dialog box allows the user to generate the GetData or SetData function code by selecting the appropriate responses within the PlcCom dialog box Be sure to declare all variables before using the PlcCom option To set up the following functions pla
249. n the touch screen other than on the rectangular spots The crosshair cursor should appear directly under your finger If needed press the left rectangle to repeat the calibration Press the right rectangle to end calibration 6 Once you have completed calibration press the touch screen again to return to normal application mode 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 16 Nn EBIT a of tp of ef cy aa oA O QO vU O O LARA Z Z TS E hd po OT OIT to PC Serial Port Pin Assignments 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Your First Project 17 Chapter 2 Creating Your First Project Often the best way to learn about new software is to just jump right in This chapter will step you through the process of installing the EZware 500 configuration software and then using the software to create a sample project that can be downloaded to your OIT We won t go into much detail as to how each feature works The purpose of this chapter is only to provide you with an overview of the process of creating a functional OIT that can communicate to a PLC For our sample project we will configure the OIT using the MemoryMap_ Master protocol but you may feel free to select whichever protocol driver you intend to use By the end of this chapter you should be able to e Install EZware 500 configuration software e Create a sample project with two windows and several graphics objects e
250. n to the main screen of EasyBuilder The mouse cursor will have a square object that represents the size of the popup window 6 Place the Indirect Window object where you want the popup window to appear 1010 1001a Rev 02 98 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 7 You can resize the object after you have placed it or double click on the object to display its attributes Indirect Window Object s Attributes x General Profile Position TM Pinned x 115 Y 67 Size Width 56 Height 56 Cancel Apply Help 8 Click the Profile tab to change the position or the size of the Indirect Window Object Note that the size does not refer to the size of the popup window since the size of the popup window is determined in the Window Settings dialog box This size refers to the area of the Indirect Window Object which is analogous to a box in which the popup window is to be placed Ifthe size is too small then the popup window will appear clipped when displayed Similarly if the size of the Indirect Window Object is larger than the actual size of the popup window the excess space will be blank Tips and Suggestions Having trouble deciding which method to use to display a base window Here are some suggestions If you want to clear the OIT display of all open windows and display a new full screen window then use the PLC Control Object function or select the Change Window option i
251. nd Select Shape 0 from the button1 library Click OK to return to the Create Function Key Object dialog box 5 Click the Label tab Click the Use label checkbox 6 Enter a dash mark into the Contents box Click OK to exit the Create Function Key Object dialog box and go back to the EasyBuilder main screen 7 Place the new Function Key object somewhere on Window 13 Reenter the Function Key Attributes dialog box by double clicking on the Function Key object 8 Click the Profile tab Select X 124 and Y 4 Select Width 21 and Height 21 9 Click OK 10 Window 13 should now look something like this The Window Bar option in the Function Key Object allows the popup window to be minimized into an icon When the Task Bar is enabled displaying Window 13 causes an icon to appear inside the Task Bar The icon is labeled with the title that appears in the Window Bar of Window 13 By double clicking the icon the window will disappear from the OIT screen The Minimize Window option in the Function Key Object accomplishes the same action when it is pressed 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 101 To maximize the window the OIT operator presses the icon The popup window reappears in the last position that it was moved to Returning to a previous window You can configure a function key to display the full sized base window that was on the OIT screen before the currently shown window Perform the following gt Create a f
252. new shape 1 When a shape is added to the library the shape is placed at the upper left hand corner of the cell In some cases however it might be necessary to place the shape in a particular location within the cell On the Window Property dialog from the Option menu select Window Property check the Using Function Key To Make Shape Library checkbox Create the desired shape Create a Function Key The area defined by the Function Key will be the area that contains the shape The mode of the Function Key does not matter Do not assign a shape or a label This example shows a shape placed in the center of the library area Yi 1010 1001a Rev 02 140 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 4 Position the objects that compose the new shape inside the function key meo Select all objects including the Function Key From the Library menu click Shape then Save to Library In the dialog box notice how the shape is positioned Di location of the objects inside the Function Key area defines how the obiects Sil be nositi nside the lj Font 2 A A RRR RRC If you find that some of the shapes included in the libraries are not useful you have the option of deleting them so that they may be replaced by another shape gt To delete a ae from a library gt A 1010 1001a Rev 02 SE Y From the Library menu click Shape then Call up library Select the librar
253. ng The Silver Series OITs are rated for NEMA 4 12 indoor or IP65 installations This means that when the OIT is properly mounted to a panel or other enclosure the front enclosure of the OIT will provide protection to the inside of the panel from splashing water wind blown dust rain or hose directed water The OIT must be installed according to the instructions in this chapter to be properly sealed Environmental Considerations The Silver Series is designed to operate in temperatures from 0 45 C It is intended for indoor installations and not designed for outdoor applications Avoid installing the Silver Series in environments with severe mechanical vibration or shocks Do not install the OIT in enclosures with rapid temperature variations or high humidity Either will cause condensation of water inside the device and eventual damage to the OIT 1010 1001a Rev 02 8 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Safety Precautions Please observe the following precautions when installing the Silver Series OIT Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in loss of life serious personal injury or equipment damage Warning Do not operate the OIT in areas subject to explosion due to flammable gases vapors or dusts Warning Do not connect the OIT to an AC power source You will cause permanent damage to the OIT Warning Do not attempt to use a DC power supply that does not meet OIT power requirements
254. ng e ea naiera ad ias 247 Macros using with recipes 253 Macros Variable Declarations 250 Macros Variable Initialization 251 Message board changing operation mode 123 Message board changing pencolor 123 Message board changing pen style 123 Message board clearing 124 Message Board using 122 Index meter display 244 68644 eee e o AR E Minimize windows feature Modify afontfile Monopoly feature o o Moving a part or object Moving Shape Object scaling feature Moving Shape Object using Moving windows feature Multi copy command using Multiple copies of object on screen making MultiState Switch Object N NEMA rating Noise Immunity 4 Nudge tools using 0 Numeric Data Object using Numeric Input Object using numeric register o OIT Operator Interface Terminal on line simulation mode Opening projects Opening windows orscreens Operating Modes 4 operating temperature P Panel Preparation Password Protection PLC block pack feature PLC Control Object PLC displaying windows Polyg
255. ng the Ethernet Port at the end of this chapter PLC Block Pack Determines how many words are read from the PLC in one communication cycle For more information on this feature see PLC Block Pack at the end of this chapter Using EZware 500 61 General Settings Configuration System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux Task button Attribute v Position Right Background color e Text Left adjust Alarm bar Pixels per scroll 8 v Scroll speed 0 4 No of windows 6 v Password 0 Startup window no 10 v Back light saver 0 Cursor color fe Buzzer Enable Common window Popup window Above any others Y Attribute Above base screen Extra no of event 0 RTC source Intemal RTC Print Printer None C Print sequence number C Print time tag C Extended time format D H M C Print date tag C Extended date format Y M D No error detection v Message board window No 0 1071999 0 Task button attribute Used to Disable or Enable the Task Bar window The position field determines if the buttons on the window are located on the Left or Right on the OIT screen When the Task Bar is enabled it allows access to the Fast Selection window The background color and text alignment can a
256. ns only the window s Text Meter Trend Bitmap and Shape objects All shapes and bitmaps on the Window are printed whether they are part of another object Bit Lamp Function Key etc or stand alone Shape and Bitmap objects However the Patterns associated with the shapes are not printed Print Text amp Meter amp Trend amp All Bitmap amp All Shape The printed Window contains only the window s Text Meter Trend Bitmap and Shape objects All shapes and bitmaps on the Window are printed whether they are part of another object Bit Lamp Function Key etc or stand alone Shape and Bitmap objects e Next Page Advances the Printer to the next page If desired attach a Shape and a Label to the Function Key Using PLC Control Object You can print a copy of the screen that is currently displayed on the OIT by using the PLC Control Object This feature allows you to print a hardcopy of the current screen whenever directed by the PLC Using the PLC Control Object to print the OIT screen From the Parts menu select PLC Control The PLC Control Object dialog box appears Click Add The PLC Control Object s Attribute dialog box appears Select Screen hardcopy for Type of control in the Attribute box Select the Device type and Device Address for the actual PLC bit address you wish to use Click OK to return to the PLC Control Object dialog box Ow You should see a new entry which lists the PLC address that is monitored
257. nstant Any format other than this format will cause compile error e 40 Illegal Macro statement before declaration statement For example Macro Command main int g 10 For g 2 0 To 2 g 3 4 gl 9 int h k lt illegal definitions must occur before any statements or expressions Next g 2 End Macro Command e 41 Floating point can not bitwise shift e 42 Missing function return value e 43 Function can not return a value e 44 Illegal Float data type in expression e 45 Error PLC address e 46 Stack can not exceed 4k bytes e 47 Only one main entrance in the Macro is allowed 276 e 48 Too many main entrance identifier The only one main entrance of Macro is Macro Command function name 1010 1001a Rev 02 260 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual End Macro Command 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using a Printer with the HMI530 550 261 Chapter 14 Using a Printer With the HMI530T 550T The HMI530 550 models support Epson ESC P2 SP and HP PCL Simple Page Mode printers The HMI530T SSOT provides a standard 25 pin female connector for connection to the printer with the following pin configuration 1 13 0000000000000 29090090900909 DB25S Female Solder Cup Side Printer pinout 25p D Female Pin Description In Out 1 STB OUT 2 DATAO OUT 3 DATA1 OUT 4
258. nt form f Attribute Color ee Align Right Adjust Content 11 Enter the color that you want for the digits displayed in the Color box 12 Enter how you want the digits to be positioned in the Align box The choices are Right Adjust aligns the number to the right margin of the part e Left Adjust aligns the number to the left margin of the part e Leading Zero inserts leading zeroes 13 14 Enter the size of the digits in the Font box Click OK The Numeric Input Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window Representing Data with Graphics Objects 191 15 Once the part is placed onto the window you can modify the attributes by double clicking on the part to display the Numeric Input Object s Attribute dialog box You may also resize the object by single clicking on the object and pulling the border of the object to the appropriate size The object s associated text may be repositioned by clicking on the object and then by dragging the text to it s new position The ASCII Data Object The ASCII Data Object is used to display the character values of a series of PLC registers The object continuously reads the PLC registers and displays the corresponding ASCII Data in the format specified The AS
259. nter the label for that state in the Content box Do the same for the other state Enter the color that you want for the label in the Color box You can select a different color for each label state Enter how you want the label to be positioned in the Align box You can select a different position for each label state Finally enter the size of the label in the Font box You can select a different font for each label state Click the Tracking checkbox if you want the labels for all states to follow or track with the movement of one label when it is moved after the Function Key object is placed onto the window Click Duplicate this label to other states if you want to use the same text on all states Click OK The Create Function Key Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label This will highlight the entire object Now click on the label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Function Key Object s Attribute dialog box To create a custom keypad you create several
260. ntly created for the project You will notice that in the sample project three windows have been created 10 11 and 12 The asterisk next to Window 10 indicates that this window has already been opened Each window is listed with the Window name and size The window name is the name that you assign to the window when it is created The window size is shown for quick reference Finally you will notice that the Open Window dialog box is also used to create a new window change any of the settings for a window or delete a window Press the Close command button to return to the main EasyBuilder screen By default when a window is opened it will replace any window that was displayed in the work area of EasyBuilder To switch between open windows click the Window menu and select from the list of windows currently open You can also cascade or tile the open windows to see the windows at the same time EasyBuilder requires more resources from your computer every time you open another window When many windows are open the performance of the computer may be affected Therefore you may wish to close some of the windows until you need to edit them gt To close a window 1 You will notice three small icons located in the upper right hand corner of each window the themaximize icon fl and the close icon x To close a window click the close icon associated with that window minimize icon These icons show in the window if minimized Otherwis
261. nto other windows Once the object has been selected and cut or copied open another window then paste the object into that window 5 In this example paste the scale meter back into Window_12 by pressing CTRL V The pasted object appears highlighted in the upper leftmost corner of the work area 6 Move the scale meter by clicking on the highlighted object and dragging it back to the original position Using the Multi Copy command The Multi Copy command is used to make multiple copies of a single object on a screen This is most useful when creating new keyboards or data tables In addition to copying the object this command will automatically assign new PLC memory addresses to each object applies only to Bit type objects Select the object you wish to copy From the Edit menu select Multi Copy The Multi Copy dialog box appears Modify the settings according to your requirements Click OK The main screen of EasyBuilder is redisplayed with the Multi Copy command executed Pio Multiple objects can be created according to these parameters Pitch vs Interval This setting affects how EasyBuilder places the copies of an object on the screen relative to each other The Pitch setting will interpret the X Distance setting as the distance from the left side of an object to the left side of the next object and the Y Distance setting as the distance from the top of one object to the top of another object The Interval setting w
262. ntrol panel grounding 9 Control panel requirements 8 Copy command 49 create a new project 41 Creating a new window 82 Creating XY Plots 222 D Data Transfer Object using 241 decrement key o 27 Deleting a part or object 50 DIP switches oa sode a ak 16 Direct Window Object 96 Display Meter Object using 218 1010 1001a Rev 02 266 Displaying your project 28 Drawing tools using 127 E FasyASCIIFontMaker utility 39 FasyBuilder Application 40 EasyManager 0 0 4 37 Editing Commands 47 Electrostatic Discharge 7 Ellipse Circle tool using 128 Event Display Object using 234 Event Log Object using 232 Events definition 234 exit Easy Bulder i cca ates 4 OR a e 43 Exiting EasyBuilder 43 extract a compressed project file 43 EZware 500 configuration software installation 19 EZware 500 software 37 F Factory default settings 16 Fast Selection key 113 Fast Selection windows changing 113 Fast Selection windows using 110 FixObjectss 4 364 ab Ba As ee Be SS 47 Flipping tools using 59 Floating Point Regist
263. of these Function Key Objects and group them together on a window to form the keypad Following the procedure outlined in Chapter 6 you can then save the keypad to a group library for later use in other projects Several predefined keypads are included with EasyBuilder To use these keypads use the Call Group Library function and access the keypad library 1010 1001a Rev 02 204 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Displaying and Using a Keypad Let s go through a sample project that uses one of the predefined keypads included in EasyBuilder to edit a Numeric Input Object and an ASCII Input Object This example will show you how to place these objects on a window screen and then use the keypad to edit the data registers The screen we create should look like the following when finished bjec Mi AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 1 2 3 s s e e o o Ja a 8 ec o E F o H r s x t m n o e o r s t u v w x v 2 DEE ci 0 de e gt To create a sample keypad entry screen 1 Start a new project file with the initial screen configured as the startup screen Note this is the default setting Display the initial screen in the work area of EasyBuilder 2 From the Library menu click Group and then click Call up Library The Group Library dialog box appears Group Library Ed Library Name oa Including library Shape button Bitmap z A tiny1 5 tinv2 6 num1 7 Select Li
264. on key e Using a PLC Control Object e Using Simulation Mode Using a Function Key You can place a Function Key Object on a screen that is configured to print the screen When the Function Key is touched the Window containing the Function Key is sent to the printer gt To create a Function Key for printing a Window follow these steps 1 From the Parts menu select Function Key 2 Under the General tab select the Hard Copy option button The Attributes button is enabled 3 Select the Attributes button The Attributes determine what part s of the Window are printed Print Text amp Meter Trend The printed Window contains only the window s Text Meter amp Trend objects Print Text amp Meter amp Trend amp All Shape but not including Pattern The printed Window contains only the window s Text Meter Trend and Shape objects All shapes on the Window are printed whether they are part of another object Bit Lamp Function Key etc or stand alone Shape objects However the Patterns associated with the shapes are not printed Print Text amp Meter amp Trend All Bitmap The printed Window contains only the window s Text Meter Trend and Bitmap objects All bitmaps on the Window are printed whether they are part of another object Bit Lamp Function Key etc or stand alone Bitmap objects e Print Text amp Meter amp Trend amp All Bitmap amp All Shape but not including Pattern The printed Window contai
265. on tool using 267 Popup Window creating 24 Popup windows displaying 95 Port Wing i load ie Ye Bak Pe 11 14 Power supply requirements 10 Printer viso nb ke SESE REE EX 263 Printing projects 2 2 e ee ee 43 Programming the OIT wiring 15 Projecte Share a e 3 Project creatine Lira ee 19 Projects Editing 41 Projects Opening se ia ra a 41 Pulsing a bit using Set Bit Object 176 R Rectangle tool using 127 Redocommand 48 Reserved local bits e s o cs soror eceu 166 Reserved local wordS 168 Reset switch s so a e e mra e a a aa a 16 Resizing a part or Object 50 Rotation tools using 60 S Safety Precautions 8 Same Sizeto0 S o 56 Sample Project o 21 Saving eco da bee DAR EE Sea ES 28 Saving Projects s s 2 2 0 00000048 43 scalelines 225 nea ii 25 Scale lines tool using 129 Security Passwords 91 select all bjects s ss s SiGe ee hae eS GS 48 select next object gt sas gs ece e a 48 Selecting graphic objects 47 Set Bit Object using o o o 175 Set Word Object using 181 Shape libraries using 137 Shape Object using 132 Shapes definitionof 131 Sha
266. onding value in the format specified The PLC register can be a 16 bit 32 bit or a 64 bit word By using the keypad the OIT operator can enter a new value gt To create a Numeric Input Extend Object EEE 1 I From the Parts menu click Numeric Input Extend Or click the Numeric Input Extend icon in the Partl toolbar The Create Numeric Input Extend Object dialog box appears Create Numeric Input Extend Object E General Numeric Shape Font Description Il i i Read address Device type LW w Device address 0 BN No ofwords 1 l Trigger address TA Device type LB w Device address 0 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Numeric Input part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part In the Read address frame select the PLC register or OIT internal memory address that the part continuously reads and writes to You can select BIN binary or BCD format Select No of words that the part should read 1 16 bits 2 32 bits 4 64 bits In the Trigger address frame select the PLC coil or OIT internal memory address that is used to trigger write access to the register If the coil is set then write access is enabled If the coil is clear then write access is disabled Note If you want the register to always have write access use one of the always on internal coils of the OIT LB9000 9009 10
267. onstant value between 32767 and 32767 Print On the OIT550 causes the text in the Contents box to be printed when the event is triggered or returns to i normal Category Not used Reserved for later use 6 Inthe Text frame enter a text string in the Content text box that is to be displayed when an event is triggered 7 Select the color of the text string in the Color box Select the font size of the text string in the Font box Sizes 16 and 24 are available 9 The Write Value text box can be used to display a popup window on the HMI screen as a result of acknowledging a triggered event Enter the number of the window to be displayed If 0 is entered this option is disabled Check the Use label library box if you would like to use the database of text labels Click the Label Library box to create a new label if necessary go gt For more information on how to use the label library consult Chapter 7 Creating and Using Databases and Languages ha ha Click OK to close the Event Log Object s Attributes dialog box The Event Log Object dialog box reappears with the new entry listed You can edit the attributes of an existing alarm by clicking on the Setting button Any entries can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button 1010 1001a Rev 02 232 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 12 Click Close to close the Event Log Object dialog box The Event Log Object i
268. open 3 To display an open window click on the window number in the Window Treebar To display a window that is not yet open double click on the window number This will automatically open the window and display it 4 To change any settings or close an open window click on the window number to select it Then right click anywhere inside the Window Treebar to display a pop up dialog box Select Close to close the window or Setting to change any of the window settings 5 Finally to create a new window click on any window number that is not currently used Then right click inside the Window Treebar and click Create 1010 1001a Rev 02 44 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual gt Using the Window Treebar to change object attributes F Objects 1 On the Window Treebar click adjacent to any window number The tree will expand to list the objects on that window as shown H 4 Fast Selection E 6 Common Window BP_1 Bottom Layer AN_O LW212 TX_0 BP_0 AN_1 LW210 SW_O LW25 WP_O LW25 SW_1 LW25 11 Trends 12 Bar Graphs 13 Meter Displays 14 Event Display 15 Alarm Display 16 Numeric Entry 17 Graphics 18 ASCII Entry 19 Animation E E H E E E 2 The Object ID of each objects will be listed For example TX_0 is Text Display 0 FK_0 is Function Key 0 etc 3 To highlight a particular object on the screen click on the Object ID in the list This allows the quick selec
269. or the ASCII Input part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Read address frame select the PLC register or OIT internal memory address that the part continuously reads Select No of words that the part should read ex 1 2 characters Range to 16 4 Inthe Trigger address frame select the PLC coil or OIT internal memory address that is used to trigger write access to the register If the coil is set then write access is enabled If the coil is clear then write access is disabled Note If you want the register to always have write access use one of the always on internal coils of the OIT LB9000 9009 5 Enter how you want the digits to be positioned in the Adjust box The choices are e Left the OIT enters the characters into the PLC registers so that when the OIT reads the contents the characters are left aligned e Right the OIT enters the characters into the PLC registers so that when the OIT reads the contents the characters are right aligned 6 Click the Shape tab to configure a shape or bitmap that is displayed behind the number 1010 1001a Rev 02 194 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 7 Click the Font tab to display the Font form Create ASCII Input Extend Object General Shape Font Attribute Color a gt Font 16 8 Enter the color that you want for the characters displayed in the Color box 9
270. ork it is possible that one or more of the devices may fail without affecting other devices on the network When this happens plant personnel may need to be notified of the failure while still maintaining communications with the rest of the network Communications failures to any node can be managed by the OIT A series of local bits monitor and control communications failures on both the main and auxiliary communications ports Bits PLC Node LB9100 9227 Main port nodes 0 127 LB9228 9355 Aux port nodes 0 127 When a communications failure is detected on a particular PLC node address the corresponding local bit will be turned off and communication to that node address is suspended To restart communications to that node the bit must be turned back on 1010 1001a Rev 02 76 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Using the Aux Port The RS 232 aux port can be used to communicate to a secondary PLC The setup screen for the aux port can be found as a tab option under the Edit System Parameters menu selection 7The AUX port isnot available in the HMI504T PLC RS 232 AUX RS 232 Port Pin Designations Pin assignment of the 9 pin female Sub D PLC RS 232 Port Pin Symbol PLC RS 232 AUX RS 232 1 Aux_TxD Transmitted Data 2 TxD Transmitted Data 3 RxD Received Data 4 Not used 5 GND Signal Ground 6 Aux_RxD Received Data 7 CTS Clear to
271. ou can display a maximum of six popup windows at one time and every time a popup window is displayed on the OIT screen an icon representing that window is displayed on the window bar of the task bar The window bar can be displayed or removed by pressing the Window Bar Key labeled Easy Besides containing the popup window icons the Window Bar also contains three optional indicators the Touch CPU and Alarm indicators The Touch Indicator ul This optional feature provides you with additional feedback when pressing the touch screen of the OIT One of three colors is displayed in the circle depending upon what area of the touch screen is touched The three areas are e Non configured area Any area on the touch screen that does not contain an active touch screen object e Active area Any area that contains an active touch screen object which when pressed executes some action e Inactive area Any area that contains an active touch screen object but the active object is not able to execute its intended function For example a Function Key with the Popup Window option is defined as an active area when first pressed since it causes the popup window to be displayed However once the popup window is displayed pressing this key serves no purpose and then it becomes an inactive area gt To activate the touch indicator 1 From the Edit menu select System Parameters The System Parameter Setting dialog box appears Click the Gener
272. ow 13 should now look something like this 1010 1001a Rev 02 100 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual The Window Bar option in the Function Key Object allows the popup window to move about the OIT screen When Window 13 is displayed the OIT operator is able to move the popup window about the screen by touching the Window Bar on the top of Window 13 then touching another area of the OIT display where the Window should be relocated Creating a popup window that can be minimized By using the Task Bar popup windows you create for display on the OIT can minimized to a small icon that is displayed in the Task Bar To create a popup window that can be minimized you must perform the following steps e Create a popup window e Adda Function Key object with the Window Bar attribute in the popup window e Enable the Task Bar Edit Menu gt System Parameters select General tab in the Task button area select Enable from the Attribute pull down menu e Adda Function Key object with the Minimize Window attribute in the popup window optional Once more an example is in order Enabling and using the Task Bar are discussed later in this chapter Creating a window that can be minimized 1 Use Window 13 from the last example 2 From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box is displayed 3 Click Minimize Window Click the Shape tab Click Use Shape Click on the Shape Library comma
273. ow in the OIT that you can enable to display this information When created the common window always operates in the background as a full screen window that overlays any full screen base window displayed Whenever you create a new project the common window Window 6 is automatically created 1010 1001a Rev 02 102 gt To Access the common window Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 1 From the Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears Open Window No Window name Size Fast Selection Common Window 10 Initial 320 240 50 NumericKeypad 320 240 New Window Setting Delete Open Close 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 103 2 Highlight the Common Window and click Settings The Window Setting dialog box appears Window Setting Name Common Window Window no 6 Start Pos X o Wie o Size Width E Height 240 Style M Tracking J Monopoly M Clipping Coherence Security level Lowest Underlay window 1 None di None 3 None Cancel 3 As you can see most of the parameters for a common window are disabled and cannot be changed Window 6 is always reserved for the common Window Although the Style settings are active none of these settings affects the operation of the common window 4 Press OK The Open Window dialog box reappears with the Common Window sele
274. ow the startup screen of the project You can test any objects you have created which require touch screen input by clicking on them In this example clicking on the increment key simulates the key as it is pressed on the touch screen Simulation Mode always uses the compiled version of the project that you have created the eob file Therefore you must save and compile any changes you make to the project before you can simulate it Simulating the OIT is done in on line or off line mode On line simulation has two modes 1010 1001a Rev 02 30 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Normal mode requires that the OIT be connected to the computer and that the PLC be connected to the OIT Direct mode requires only that the PC be connected to the PLC Please note the following e Maple Systems standard communication cables will not work in Direct mode The OIT end of the cable must be wired for the PC s serial port e To simulate protocols using RS422 485 an RS422 485 card must be installed in the PC e The Allen Bradley DH485 and Telemecanique UniTelWay protocols are not supported in Direct mode The On Line simulation mode is selected in EasyManager by checking or unchecking the Direct Online Simulator box Whether started from EasyBuilder or EasyManager the Online Simulator will operate in the mode selected by the Direct Online Simulator box On line simulation is most useful when a project is near comple
275. ow with the Popup Window Normal setting Window 13 is now called from the base window Hint21 with Common Window As expected window 13 is displayed over window 21 The entire area of window 21 can be seen if the OIT operator activates it by pressing it Now suppose that the same scenario is played out with the Popup Window Above any others setting 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 105 Window 13 is now called from the base window as before Notice that although window 13 was called after window 21 it is window 21 that remains above Even when window 13 is activated by pressing it window 21 continues to be the dominant window always displaying above window 13 Displaying the common window above below the base screen This setting resolves the conflict that can occur if a graphics object on the common window occupies the same space on the OIT display as a graphics object on a base screen Using the Above base screen attribute forces the graphics object on the common window to cover the base window graphics object Using Below base screen has the opposite effect This text is on the Base window Common Window Object Base Window Object This text is on the Common vindou Common Window Base Window 1010 1001a Rev 02 106 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual When above base screen is set the result is This text is on the Base window Common Window Object This text is on
276. part The Animation Object s Attribute dialog box appears Animation Object s Attributes General Shape Label Profile Description Read address Device type LW v Device address o BIN v No of words 12 No of states E 4 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Animation part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 5 Inthe Read address frame select the starting PLC coil or OIT internal memory address that the part reads from You can select BIN binary or BCD format The No of words is set to 2 and cannot be changed 6 Inthe No of states box select the total number of states to be displayed Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab A 8 Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab 1010 1001a Rev 02 200 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 9 Click on the Profile tab The Profile dialog box appears Animation Object s Attributes General Shape Label Profile Position Pinned x 113 Size Width 393 Shape rectangle size Width X 113 3 10 The Position settings refer to the overall location of the Animation Object on the window screen 11 The Size settings refer to the overall size of the Animation Object 12 The Shape rectangle size
277. plot point Device address PLC or OIT internal memory address BIN or BCD Select binary BIN or BCD format If Multiple pages is selected this coil register is used to enable Device type the hold function If the coil is set then the hold function is Hold control activated Device address PLC or OIT internal memory address 3 Click the Trend Display tab to display the Trend Display form Create Trend Display Object x General Trend Description Channel 0M r Pen attribute Color E gt Value Zero fi Span 100 4 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Trend Display part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 5 Inthe Channel pull down box select each channel to modify the attributes for the channel Function Range Description Color Selects the color used for that channel Zero 0 This value is always set to 0 It represents the lowest point on a trend graph for each channel Span 1 to 32767 Selects the range for that channel 6 Click OK to close the Create Trend Display Object dialog box The main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window You 1010 1001a Rev 02 220 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual may want to create a Rectangle Object that is displayed behind the T
278. pup window is displayed which does not have the monopoly feature enabled the OIT operator is able to press any function keys on the popup window or the full screen window since objects on both screens are active In this example the OIT operator is able to press Key1 3 on the full screen window or the switch on Popup 1010 1001a Rev 02 86 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Window 21 If another popup window is displayed that does have the monopoly feature enabled then Key1 3 on the full screen window will not respond when pressed Please note that the monopoly feature only disables touch screen objects on the full screen window The switch on Popup Window 21 can still be activated as can any popup window displayed on the full screen The monopoly feature can be used to display a popup window with some action that the OIT operator must perform before being allowed to do some other action on the OIT For example you might construct a dialog box that asks the OIT operator if some step in the control process has been performed The dialog box would have Yes and No function key options which with the monopoly feature enabled the OIT operator must press before continuing Clipping Feature With clipping enabled any portion of a child window that lies outside the boundary of the parent window is clipped or not displayed on the OIT screen The tracking feature must be enabled when the clipping option is used For this
279. r a keypad takes precious space on the OIT display Ideally it should appear on screen only when a key was pressed and then by pressing another or the same key the keypad should disappear This is essentially the purpose of the Fast Selection window The Fast Selection window is available only if the Task Bar is activated more about this feature later in this chapter The Fast Selection window can also be used as a menu key that allows the OIT operator to rapidly switch screens Whenever a new project is created the fast selection window Window 4 is automatically created 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 109 gt To access a fast selection window 1 From the Window menu select Open Window The Open Window dialog box appears Open Window No Window name Size Fast Selection Common Window New Window 10 Initial 320 240 50 NumericKeypad 320 240 Setting Delete Open Close 2 Highlight the Fast Selection Window and click Settings The Window Setting dialog box appears 1010 1001a Rev 02 110 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 3 Click Fast Selection The Window Setting dialog box appears Window Setting Name Fast Selection Window no 4 Start Pos X o NE o Size Width 70 Height 214 Style M Tracking Monopoly M Clipping Coherence Security level Lowest Underlay window is None 2 None
280. r is higher priority than an Assignment operator Main Functions and Sub functions The macro must have one and only one Macro_Command main function which is the execution start point of any macro file Any sub functions must be pre defined and written before the main function The format is 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 251 Macro Command main The main macro code goes here End Macro Command Any other sub functions must be declared before the main function can use it for example Sub SOR int MyVar sub routine code goes her End Sub Macro Command main The main macro code goes here Result SQR MyNum The sub function SQR is called End macro command Local and Global Variables Local variables exist only within the function in which they are defined Global variables exist throughout the entire macro and are available for any function in the macro NOTE Ifa local variable has the same name as a global variable the compiler will use the local variable in the function instead Global variables are global only within the macro file in which they exist It is not possible to share variables between different macro files To share data between macro files read write the data to share into the OIT s Local Word LW and or Local Bit LB addresses using the macro s GetData and SetData UM_PLC functions Creating Variable Arrays Arrays are fixed depth and 1 dim
281. r object which enable data to be copied from one or more registers located in the PLC or the OIT to other registers The Data Transfer object is used to continuously transfer data at a predefined rate The Recipe Transfer object is a touch screen object that transfers data when activated by the OIT operator Using the Data Transfer Object In some projects you create you may need to transfer large blocks of data from PLC OIT registers to other PLC OIT registers The Data Transfer Object is used to copy data from one or more PLC registers or HMI internal memory to other registers continuously on a timed interval There is no limit to the number of Data Transfer Objects that you can create other than the HMI s available memory Each Object created can transfer from 1 16 continuous registers or 1 255 coils gt To create a Data Transfer Object 1 From the Parts menu click Data Transfer Or click the Data Transfer icon in the Draw toolbar The Data Transfer Object dialog box appears Data Transfer Object Source Destination Mode Interval No of bit Word 0 0s 1010 1001a Rev 02 240 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 2 Click the Add button The Data Transfer Object dialog box appears Data Transfer Object Description j Source address Device type y Device address Aux Destination address Device type LB Device address AUX Attribute Address mode Bit Interva
282. rated place and hold your finger somewhere on the touch screen other than on the rectangle spots The crosshair cursor should appear directly beneath your finger If necessary press the left rectangle to repeat the calibration Press the right rectangle to end calibration Once calibration is complete press the touch screen again to go back to normal application mode The touch screen is always calibrated at the factory so it shouldn t require calibration under normal circumstances That s all there is to EasyManager Most of the time you will use EasyManager to start the project that you have downloaded from EasyBuilder to the OIT by clicking the Jump To Application button 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 37 The EasyASCIIFontMaker The EasyASCIIFontMaker application allows you to modify the text font characters that are supplied with EZware 500 This feature of the Silver Series OITs enables you to create any special text characters that you may need In fact you can even create an entirely new font EasyBuilder s Default Text Fonts EasyBuilder uses three font types to display text in eight different font sizes 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 e The Type 8 font is used to display the size 8 font characters The font characters are stored in a file in the EZware 500 directory called ASCFONT 8 e The Type 16 font is used to display the size 16 32 and 64 font characters These font characters are stored ina
283. re than two inches from the OIT s power input Shield wire bare Black wire Red wire 24Vde power supply Control OIT panel rear side i Tusa Ferrite coil a a ni E a aye Shield drain FG L oe 3 DC Output V Gnd Aes ste DC Output V 24V Oo o Ly 0 OIT Power Inputs gt To connect the OIT to power 1 Connect the power cable to the OIT a Strip the power cable shield to expose 2 of the black and red wires b Strip about 4 of insulation from the black and red wires c Thread the black and red wires through the ferrite core The shield wire must be outside d Connect the red wire to the DC positive input of the OIT power terminal e Connect the black wire to the DC negative input of the OIT power terminal f Connect the power cable shield wire to the OIT power terminal s chassis ground input 2 Route the power cable to the OIT power supply The power cable should not be any longer than necessary 3 Install the power supply wires as follows with colors shown for Maple Systems cable P N 6030 0009 1010 1001a Rev 02 12 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Color Power Supply HMI504T HMI520T HMI530T HMI550T Red Output 24 Vdc 24V 24V DC24V Black Output 24 Vdc return GND GND DC 24V Shield Case ground FG an L z The power connector on the Silver Series is a terminal bloc
284. rend Graph if the Trend Display is shown in a window screen with other objects 7 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the attributes of the Trend Display by double clicking on the part Creating XY Plots The XY Plot Object is used to sample the data in two consecutive 16 bit PLC registers and plot one register against the other You can configure the XY Plot as a single page or with multiple pages that can be viewed by scrolling through the pages The sampling rate and number of plots per page can be customized per plot A hold feature allows you to freeze the graph and or clear the graph gt To create an XY Plot Object i 1 From the Parts menu click XY Plot Or click the XY Plot icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create XY Plot Object dialog box appears Create XY Plot Object General Plot Page type SGFGERESO v Sampling time 1 seconds Plot point 110 Read address Device type LW Device address 0 BIN 2 Inthe General frame select the following attributes Function Attribute Range Description Select Single page or Multiple pages Multiple pages configure the trend display as a window to the trend graph in which different segments can be viewed by scrolling Single page or Page Type Multiple pages Available if Multiple pages is selected You can select the number No of page 1 to 31 of pages you wish to view Select 1 if you want to view a singl
285. ributes dialog box The Alarm Scan Object dialog box reappears with the new entry listed You can edit the attributes of an existing alarm by clicking on the Setting button Any entries can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button 10 Click Close to close the Alarm Scan Object dialog box The Alarm Scan Object is active no matter what windows are currently displayed on the OIT screen Therefore you do not have to place the object onto a window screen Displaying Alarms using the Alarm Display Object Though the Alarm Scan Object continuously monitors the PLC for alarms it cannot display the alarms without the Alarm Display Object or the Alarm Bar Object The Alarm Display Object takes the alarm strings sent to it from the Alarm Scan Object and displays them on a window screen as a list The list contains all of the active alarms occurring with the most recently activated alarm at the top of the list You do not have to display the entire list of alarms on a window screen You can limit the viewable alarms to a scrollable window that displays a given number of lines You can then create a register that allows you to scroll through the list of alarms using the scrollable window 1010 1001a Rev 02 Capturing Alarms and Events 225 gt To create an Alarm Display Object Paa 1 From the Parts menu click Alarm Display Or click the Alarm Display icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Alarm Display Object dialog box appears Creat
286. ring Data i iii bbe eee ws 73 1010 1001a Rev 02 268 Simulation Mode aoaaa o o 31 Simulation Mode wiring 34 Simulation Screen o lt s s ena o o 31 Simulation directmode 34 Simulation troubleshooting 33 Snap Opti0M s s s pise a Dare E E E e 47 Starting EZwareS00 eo ariaa naad 20 Startup Window creating 22 States definition O 136 System Parameters o o 21 system requirements o o 19 T Tag Databases o o 155 tag databases label library 160 Tag databases label library 157 Tag Databases tag library 155 Tag databases using the tag library 157 Tag Library Import and export 156 Task Bar settings o c ccam oii 121 Task Bar using s sw moeta 119 Text Box Object using 130 Text TONIS a ets AE o 39 Toggle Switch Object using 177 Touch Indicator o sss oae o o 65 Touchscreen calibrationof 16 Tracking feature sis s oom ade ss 85 Transparent feature bitmaps 147 Trend Display Object using 220 222 U Underlay Windows 92 Undo command 48 W Window Copy ar mes a a d E a 49 Window frames creating 93 Window Name o o o 84 Window No Treebar using to navigate 44 Window
287. rmation about these and other training sources visit the Maple Systems web site at http www maple systems com Conventions When using EZware 500 there are usually several ways to perform a task For example if you want to copy a graphics object you can e Click the Copy command on the Edit menu e Click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar e Press the CTRL C keys on your computer 1010 1001a Rev 02 2 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual In most cases we will describe each method when the task is first discussed The menu method is then used whenever the task is used in later procedures Other conventions used in this book are listed in the following table Convention Meaning Characters that you must type exactly as they appear For example if you are directed to type a setup you should type all the bold characters exactly as they are printed Bold Placeholders for information you must provide For example if you are directed to type filename you Italic should type the actual name for a file instead of the word shown in italic type Italics are also used to indicate a glossary term ALL CAPITALS Directory names file names key names and acronyms KEY1 KEY2 A plus sign between key names means to press and hold down the first key while you press the second key click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button usually the left mouse button once Double click Refers
288. rol is the default and sets the behavior as outlined above A setting of Nature will result in the object remaining at the layer assigned during development 7 The Part Layout setting is global and affects all PLC controlled objects in the application Nudging Objects Nudging is used to fine tune the movement of objects in the work area of EasyBuilder Using the nudge feature on a selected object will move that object in the specified direction either by one pixel or by the grid setting amount and right La commands 1 Select one of the layered objects or a group of objects in the work area of EasyBuilder 2 From the Edit menu click Nudge then select the direction of the nudge or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Aligning Objects Alignment can be used to quickly align two or more objects To better illustrate refer to the left side of Window_ 12 of the sample project Alignment Nake Same Size O Using the align left j command 1 Select the objects you wish to align For this example select the three rectangle objects of Window_ 12 1010 1001a Rev 02 52 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 2 From the Edit menu click Align then Left or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the objects back in their original position Using the align right al command 1 Select the objects yo
289. rrent security level is Level 2 the highest security level you can move quickly from this level to Level 1 or Level 0 by entering the number 1 or 0 respectively into this register no password is required This feature enables someone who has the highest security level to switch the OIT to a lower level without having to memorize all three passwords Assigning Underlay Windows EasyBuilder allows you to assign up to three underlay windows to any base window that you are creating First create the underlay window then select it from the pull down list box when you change the settings of the base window How to Display Underlay Windows When you have common objects to display on multiple screens use the Underlay Window feature to store these on underlay windows attached to a base window This decreases the amount of memory required for the project The base window calls the underlay window Each full size base window can display up to three underlay windows which are called Underlay 1 Underlay 2 and Underlay 3 Objects on the underlay windows cannot be edited from the base window on which they are displayed A pop up window cannot display any underlay windows To assign underlay windows to a base window you must first create the underlay windows Underlay windows are created the same way base windows are created Then you can assign the underlay windows to the base window To assign underlay windows to a base window 1 From th
290. rs This section shows the fundamental operation of EasyBuilder from saving files printing projects and selecting the target PLC to showing how graphics objects can be easily manipulated in the EasyBuilder work area When you have completed this chapter you will be better able to use the features that are explained in later chapters 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 39 The following illustration is used for reference to the following sections El EasyBuilder EBPrjl epj Window 10 Initial EB ile Edit View Option Draw Parts Library Tools Window Help Aeloc AMRA 2 B 2 E RIS FONT e Al ale Fa aati fo a 2 l 3 4 L 5 6 7 8 L 9 A _ m display For Help press Fi Omron C Series and COMI i ix 267 Iv 28 Managing Projects Like most Windows application software EasyBuilder will open save close and print files using the standard windows format Opening Editing Projects gt To create a new project O 1 Onthe File Menu click New or click the New icon in the Standard toolbar The EasyBuilder dialog box appears 2 Select the OIT model you intend to use with your project 1010 1001a Rev 02 40 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 3 Select the Display Mode you intend to use with your project x Welcome to EasyBuilder 500 4 Please select your model Model HMI550H 640 x 480 ni Display mode Landscape
291. s 8 Control Panel Grounding 9 Connect OIT Chassis Ground to Control Panel 9 Power Supply Selection 10 Cable Routing and Noise Immunity 10 Installation 22 2 5 sac sasa a 11 Connect the OIT to Power 11 Connect the OIT to the PLC 12 Panel Preparation 13 Mount the OIT to the Panel 14 Configuration Wiring 14 Connect the OIT to the PC for Configuration 15 Factory Configuration 15 Chapter 2 Creating Your First Project 17 Before You Begin 17 Connecting OIT to Computer 17 Starting EZware 500 18 Creating a Sample Project 19 Setting the System Parameters 19 Creating a Startup Window 20 Creating a Popup Window 22 Finishing Up sai 044040044 044 26 Chapter 3 Simulator Mode 29 The Simulation Screen 29 Troubleshooting Tools During Simulation 31 Capturing Simulation Screens to Use as Documentation 31 Wiring for Normal Simulation Mode 32 Chapter 4 Using EZware 500 35 OVEIVIEW Ladinia 35 The EasyManager 35 Communications Settings 36 Operating Modes 36 The EasyASCIIFontMaker 37 EasyBuilder s Default Text Fonts 37 Using the EasyASCIIFontMaker 37 The EasyBuild
292. s is a point to point connection such as the one illustrated below L 192 168 0 10 S 192 168 0 50 Sub 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 50 OIT Master Ethernet Crossover no This allows one OIT touchscreen to be the master and the PLC to act as the slave device Only one PLC can be addressed in this type of configuration Multiple OIT Masters If several OITs need to be connected to one PLC and the OITs need to be independent of one another each can be 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 73 disconnected without interrupting the other then they can be connected as individual master devices using an Ethernet switch as illustrated below L 192 168 0 20 L 192 168 0 40 L 192 168 0 30 S 192 168 0 10 S 192 168 0 10 S 192 168 0 10 Sub 255 255 255 0 Sub 255 255 255 0 Sub 255 255 255 0 oca OIT OIT OIT Master Master Master 4 L 192 168 0 150 S 192 168 0 20 Sub 255 255 255 0 Standard Ethernet OIT Cabling Slave SOS EthernetSwitch PLC 192 168 0 10 This configuration can only support one PLC and all master OITs must use the same protocol and the same server address for the PLC A master OIT will not be able to see local memory or status of any other master OIT A slave OIT can be connected to monitor control a specific OIT master A slave can control and view the internal memory and
293. s Installation amp Operation Manual 2 Set Aux timeout constant This setting determines how long in seconds the OIT will wait for a response from the Aux device The range is from 0 to 127 seconds 3 Set Aux block pack This is used to determine how the unit will communicate register polling to the Aux device By increasing this number larger blocks of registers can be fetched from the Aux device by issuing one command for a block of registers instead of a command for each individual register In some cases this speeds the update of information on the display but in other cases it may cause unwanted delays Experiment with this number to optimize When Entering in data register types and address using the extended mode to be used by the Aux port device select the Aux check box first then add the address in the extended mode format node address address Create Numeric Input Extend Object General Numeric Shape Font Description 3x Read address Device type Device address No of words y Ap Trigger address Device type LB w Device address 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 79 Chapter 5 Creating Windows This section shows how to create windows using EasyBuilder To better illustrate some of the examples please open the sample project HMI504T HMI520T EPJ HMIS30T EPJ or HMISSOT EPJ included with the
294. s active no matter what windows are currently displayed on the OIT screen Therefore you do not have to place the object onto a window screen Displaying Events Using the Event Display Object Though the Event Log Object continuously monitors the PLC for triggered events it cannot display the events without the Event Display Object The Event Display Object takes the event strings sent to it from the Event Log Object and displays them on a window screen as a list The list contains all of the events that have occurred with the most recently triggered event at the top of the list You do not have to display the entire list of events on a window screen You can limit the viewable events to a scrollable window that displays a given number of lines You can then create a register that allows you to scroll through the list of events using the scrollable window An acknowledge feature allows the OIT operator to touch an event recorded in the event list to display a popup window The popup window can than be used to display further instructions to the OIT operator or to perform some operation gt To create an Event Display Object 1 From the Parts menu A Event Display Or click the Event Display icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Event Display Object dialog box appears Create Event Display Object po General Event Display Description Read address 7 Device type LW w Device address BIN v No of words
295. s and internal data registers of the OIT are represented using nine parts e Word Lamp Object e Set Word Object e Multistate Switch Object e Numeric Data Object e Numeric Input Extend Object e ASCII Data Object e ASCII Input Extend Object e Moving Shape Object e Animation Object They are constructed in much the same manner as the parts described in the previous section With these parts however you can represent data from 16 bit 32 bit or even 64 bit data registers The Word Lamp Object The Word Lamp Object is used to represent the value of a PLC register The object continuously reads the PLC register and displays the corresponding shape or bitmap that is tagged to the number of states defined gt To create a Word Lamp Object 1 From the Parts menu click Word Lamp Or click the Word Lamp icon in the Part1 toolbar The Create Word Lamp Object dialog box appears Create Word Lamp Object E xx General Shape Label Description Read address Device type LW v Device address lo e BIN No of words fi Mau No of states fi Cancel Apply Help 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Word Lamp part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 1010 1001a Rev 02 178 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 3 Inthe Read address frame select the PLC register or OIT internal memory address You can select BIN binary or
296. s this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9067 Keypad A RdOnl ASCII Input Object located on the right side of the keypad on the den yp y bottom half The OIT clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9068 Keypad Control Al or NI located RdOnly ASCII Input Object located on any side of the keypad The OIT y yp clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys Keypad Control Al or NI located 9069 on any side of keypad window RdOnly Same as LB9068 9070 9079 Reserved for future use i The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or 9080 Keypad control AI or NI located RdOnly ASCII Input Object located on the TOP side of the touchscreen yp The OIT clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys The OIT sets this bit when user edits a Numeric Input Object or sani Keypad Control Al or NI located on ASCII Input Object located on the BOTTOM side of the window yp y touchscreen The OIT clears this bit when user presses the Enter or ESC keys 9082 9089 Reserved for future use 2 6 0 This bit is used to clear the event data Set to clear data 9090 Clear Data Event Log R W After it is set the OIT automatically clears the bit after data is erased 9091 Contrast Up Write V 2 6 0 Use to increment the contrast 9092 Contrast Down Write V 2 6 0 Us
297. sh None Frame Width 4 Color d Background Color M Paterno W Filled Pattern color es M Cancel 3 The Name and Window No are reserved to identify the Fast Selection window The other parameters can be modified see the Window Settings section earlier in this chapter for more information Notice that the default size is Width 70 and Height 214 The default was selected to create a sidebar that contains function keys to display other windows The example below illustrates how the Fast Selection Window can be used for this purpose 4 Press OK The Open Window dialog box reappears with the Fast Selection window selected 5 Ifyou wish to open the fast selection window click Open Otherwise click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 111 Using the Fast Selection Key The fast selection key is used to display the Fast Selection window Pressing the key again causes the Fast Selection window to close sy VIEW Changing screens using the Fast Selection window One of the more useful purposes of the Fast Selection window is to use it as a menu key for switching screens on the OIT display The following example illustrates how you might create a Fast Selection window for this purpose The example steps you through creating six full screen base windows enabling the Task Bar and creating a Fast Selection window to call up the six
298. styles secs cesset pudga aop 85 Window definition OL 3 1010 1001a Rev 02 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Window deleting 94 Window fundamental settings 83 Window selecting a new background color 93 Windows how to display 94 Windows minimize feature 102 Windows moving feature 101 Wiring diagrams 0 14 Wiring multiple OITs 73 X Pea E ii o n 222 Z ZOOM a eh tee eg aids BA S 47
299. sword for access to level the middle security This field is not visible if the security control box is unchecked e Password Level 2 is used to enter the numeric password for access to level 2 the highest security This field is not visible if the security control box is unchecked For more information on windows security consult Chapter 5 Creating Windows Editor Settings Configuration System Parameter Setting Beginning window no y Compiler level Level 1 Part layout Nature Address mode Extended 1010 1001a Rev 02 66 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Beginning Window No Indicates what window 0 number EasyBuilder will start using when numbering windows When the project is first created in EasyBuilder the software automatically creates a beginning window EasyBuilder can be set to start numbering windows that are created starting with the initial window at either 10 or 1 The default and recommended setting is to start at 10 Compiler Level Used to set the compiler warning level Before a project can be downloaded to the OIT the project has to be saved and compiled EasyBuilder can generate two levels of compiler messages Level 0 is the minimum level and generates only error messages Level is the highest level and generates both error and warning messages regarding part and PLC address size mismatch Level 0 is the d
300. t 5 Click OK The Create Bitmap Object dialog box reappears The bitmap that you selected should be displayed in this dialog box 6 Click OK The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with an outline of the bitmap object in the upper left corner of the work area 7 Move the bitmap to the location desired and click The bitmap appears with small square boxes around the perimeter of the bitmap 8 The bitmap can be resized or you can edit the bitmap s parameters by double clicking to enter the Bitmap Object s Attribute dialog box Graphics Libraries Graphics Libraries are files that come with EasyBuilder which contain graphics shapes and bitmaps Over 500 predefined shapes and bitmaps are included with EasyBuilder In addition you can create new bitmaps or shapes and add them to the libraries You can even create new libraries as you need them Each library contains a maximum of 48 shapes or bitmaps Each shape or bitmap has a maximum of 32 states or pictures tied to it EasyBuilder allows a maximum of ten bitmap libraries and ten shape libraries to be open per project file Finally a group library can be used to store several graphics objects such as a keypad to be easily used when needed For example you may create a bar graph that could be used in several different projects The bar graph can be stored into the group library for easy retrieval All libraries are accessed from the Library menu or by clicking the appropriate i
301. t COM 1 Choose EXIT AD Pro we NS 1010 1001a Rev 02 18 gt To connect your l Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual PLC to the OIT Maple Systems produces PLC communications cables which will connect the OIT to most of the PLCs available The cables can be manufactured to any length you may require A listing of all the PLC cables Maple Systems offers can be found on our website If you have decided to make your own cable make sure that it is wired correctly for your particular PLC Maple Systems provides cable wiring diagrams to guide you through the construction of your cable These can also be found on our website Connect the PLC communications cable from the serial port on your PLC to the appropriate serial port on your OIT e Ifyou are using RS 232 communications then connect the OIT end of the cable to the OIT port labeled PLC RS 232 e Ifyou are using RS 485 communications then connect the OIT end of the cable to the OIT port labeled PLC RS 485 If you wish to use the Y adapter programming cable then connect to the cable end that is marked PLC Apply power to the PLC The Silver Series OIT is programmed at the factory with a sample demo that shows some features of the OIT The OIT should display a sample startup screen The OIT will now accept a new project from EZware 500 Starting EZware 500 Before you can create a sample project you must start the configuration software The EZware 500 soft
302. t Log Database Item Size RdOnly Management information The size of every item Management information The size of the database the size 9058 9059 Event Log Database Size RdOnly includes management information Total_ltem ltem_Size management_info_size These 16 registers represent the latest entries when the OIT 9060 9075 oo and ASCII RdOnly operator enters a numeric or ASCII value into one of these p J objects Register 9075 is the latest entry 9076 9079 Reserved for future use gt Twelve bytes are used to store the project name Use the ASCII 9080 9085 Project name RdOnly Data Object to display on OIT Four bytes are used to store the size of the current project in 9086 9087 Project size RdOnly bytes Use the Numeric Data Object Decimal Display to display on OIT Four bytes are used to store the size of the current project in 9088 9089 Project size Kbytes RdOnly bytes Use the Numeric Data Object Decimal Display to display on OIT Four bytes are used to store the compiler version of the current 9090 9091 Compiler Version ID RdOnly project Use the Numeric Data Object Decimal Display to display on OIT This register contains the year date when the project was last 9092 Project Compiled Date Year RdOnly compiled Use the Numeric Data Object Decimal Display to display on OIT This register contains the month date when the project was last 9093 Project Compiled Date Month RdOnly compiled Use the Num
303. t color for each label state 11 Enter how you want the label to be positioned in the Align box You can select a different position for each label state 12 Enter the size of the label in the Font box You can select a different font for each label state 13 Click the Tracking checkbox if you want the labels for all states to follow or track with the movement of one label when it is moved after the Recipe Transfer object is placed onto the window 14 Click OK The Create Recipe Transfer Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label This will highlight the entire object 15 Click on the label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part If you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Recipe Creating a Recipe A recipe consists of a number of registers using the RW or RB devices These devices are in a non volatile area of the OITs internal memory area A recipe is created by using the OIT s built in Parts to store data in the RW RB devices and then transferring that data to the selected PLC registers Recipe
304. tate and language selected for viewing Osa PL BM A 42 20M CE Dw AANA 100 YS Languaged E 1010 1001a Rev 02 160 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 4 To use the Multi Language features of the Label Library to display object labels in languages other than the default language Language 0 the function must be enabled Enable the Multi Language capability as detailed below Using Languages with the Label Library The Silver Series supports up to 4 languages for use with the Label Library text labeling In order to use the Multi Language features a label configured in multiple languages must be created and stored in the Label Library as detailed above The language displayed is selected through Internal Local Word Control LW9130 1 Text Labels in any of up to 4 languages can be displayed as configured in the Label Library In LW9130 a Value of 0 enables Language 0 as configured in the Label Library a Value of 1 enables Language 1 a Value of 2 enables Language 2 and a Value of 3 enables Language 3 Comien Marche sad Modi Dee Epon CSV le _ impot CSV Fie Save Label Fie Load Label Fi 2 The appropriate value must be written to LW9130 to enable a designated language to display For example a series of set word objects writing value to LW9130 could be placed on a setup screen Each set word might be labeled with the Language to be enabled and the appropriate value addresse
305. te as long as the window that the part is located on is open This is very similar to a self resetting timer Inc value Amount of the step value Range 1 to 32767 Upper limit The upper range allowed Range 32768 to 32767 Break time The rate at which the automatic incrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 25 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments Periodical JOG Continuously decreases the value in a 16 bit PLC register by a step value at a predefined rate as long as the window that the part is located on is open This is very similar to a self resetting timer Dec value Amount of the step value Range 1 to 32767 Bottom limit The lowest range allowed Range 32768 to 32767 Break time The rate at which the automatic decrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 25 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments Periodical bounce Automatically increases the value in a 16 bit PLC register by a step value at a predefined rate as long as the window that the part is located on is open When the upper limit is reached the value automatically decreases until it reaches 0 then repeats the process continuously Inc value Amount of the step value Range 1 to 32767 Upper limit The upper range allowed Range 1 to 32767 Break time The rate at which the automatic incrementing occurs Range 0 1 to 25 5 seconds in 0 1 second increments Step up Continuously increases the value in a 16 bit PL
306. ted Click to place the meter display in Window 11 Double click on the meter display The Meter Display Object s Attribute dialog box appears Click on the Profile tab Enter 51 for the X position Enter 16 for the Y position Enter 56 for the Width Enter 28 for the Height Click OK 1010 1001a Rev 02 24 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 13 On the main screen of EasyBuilder you should see the scaled meter display that you just created move and or change size The scaled meter display is now complete gt To create a numeric register on Window 11 1 U From the Parts menu click Numeric Data The Create Numeric Data Object dialog box appears Type Numeric Data in the Description box Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you will see a white rectangle outline that is attached to your cursor in the work area This represents the numeric register just created Click to place the numeric register on Window 11 somewhere underneath the scale meter Four pound signs should appear gt To create an increment key on Window 11 1010 1001a Rev 02 1 Y po IS Gy O Rh hn NF Rh DU 15 16 17 18 From the Parts menu click Set Word The Create Set Word Object dialog box appears Type Increment Button in the Description box Click on the pull down box of the Set Style Attribute and select JOG Enter 1 in the Inc value box Click on the pull dow
307. tent Color Write value 2 Click the Add button The Event Log Object s Attributes dialog box appears Attributes Event Log Object s Attributes Address type Read address Device address 0 Device type Attribute O On Off Condition On trigger Return to normal Print _ On trigger Return to normal 0 Category 0 Content Color I gt Font 16 y Use label library Label Library ee Font 16 y Use label library Label Library Write value 3 Inthe Address type box select Bit to trigger on the value of a PLC coil Select Word to trigger on a value or range of values in a PLC 16 bit register 4 Inthe Read address frame select the PLC coil or register to monitor for the event For word addresses select binary BIN or BCD format 5 Inthe Attribute frame select what will cause the event to be triggered Function Description Event Tria For PLC coils only Select On to trigger the event when the PLC coil is set Select Off to trigger the event when 9 the PLC coil is clear For PLC registers only Select the less than sign lt to trigger on any value that is less than the constant Condition entered Select the greater than sign gt to trigger on any value that is greater than the constant entered Select the equals to trigger when the value is equal to the constant entered Then enter a c
308. the Common window When below base screen is set the result is This text is on the Base window Base Window ObJect This text is on the Common window gt To set the above below base screen option for a common window 1 From the Edit menu select System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears 2 Select the General tab In the Common Window frame box select either Above base screen or Below base screen for the Attribute box Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder ue 7 Active graphics objects objects that display information or graphics according to a data value in a PLC register or coil take precedence over passive graphics objects objects such as circles lines rectangles etc Therefore a Set Word object on a base window will cover a Rectangle object on a common window which occupies the same space even with the Above base screen attribute enabled Changing the Active Common Window Although only one common window can be on the OIT display at one time you do have the ability to create multiple common windows by using base windows as common windows Then with the help of a Function Key object the OIT operator can change the active common window The ability to change the common window adds more flexibility to your project should you need it For example you may have a series of full screen windows which all need a keypad for entry Another series of full screen 1010 1001
309. the Parts menu click Meter Display Or click the Meter Display icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Display Meter Object dialog box appears Create Meter Display Object pere General Meter Display Description Read address z Device type LW v Device address o BIN N No of words 1 1010 1001a Rev 02 Bar Graphs Meters 4 5 Create Meter Display Object x and Trends 217 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Display Meter part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part In the Read address frame select the PLC register or OIT internal memory address You can select BIN binary or BCD format In the No of words box the only option available is 1 Click the Display Meter tab to display the Meter Display form General Meter Display Indicator Style 1 Up half Fulup Fullbottom 3 4 full Style 2 Up half Fulup Fullbottom 3 4 full Color Am RR gt Zero fo Value Span 100 Cancel Apply Help In the Indicator frame select what type of Meter Display to use Style Option Description Style 1 arm with center mark Up half Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 180 starting at the 9 o clock position Full Up Select for a display meter that ranges from 0 to 36
310. the Shape library box Scroll through the selections to selection 23 Click the shape then click OK The shape should appear in the Shape tab Click the Label tab Click the pull down box from the Color box The Color dialog box appears Click on the black color box then click OK The color box should reflect what you have chosen Select 16 in the Font box Select Left in the Align box Type ON in the Content box Click the Use Label box Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you will see a white square outline that is attached to your cursor in the work area This represents the function key just created Center the square somewhere on the bottom left portion of the work area and then click The function key should appear Double click on the function key The Function Key Object s Attribute box appears Click on the Profile tab Enter 47 for the X position Enter 168 for the Y position Enter 62 for the Width Enter 49 for the Height Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you should see the function key that you just created move and or change size This function key is used to display Window 11 gt To create a second function key on Window 10 1 Uy We could create the second function key by repeating the steps for the first function key Instead however we will take advantage of the first function key and copy it Click the first function key to highlight it From the Edit menu click Copy Fro
311. the Window Setting form select Lowest Middle or Highest level from the Security Level drop down list box Click OK to return to the Open Window dialog box 5 Click Close to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder gt To create the ability to change window security level 1 Create a window s that contains a Numeric Input Object For more information on creating a Numeric Input Object see Representing PLC Data Registers section in Chapter 6 2 From the Parts menu click Numeric Input The Create Numeric Input Object dialog box appears 3 Inthe Read address frame select local word LW9040 LW9040 is a reserved internal data register of the OIT that is used to change the window security access level Select BIN binary format Select No of words as 2 Click the Numeric tab to display the Numeric form 6 Inthe Display attribute box select Decimal display or if you wish to prevent others from seeing the password code select Mask display 7 Then create a numeric keypad to allow entering numbers into the Numeric Input Object see Chapter 7 Using and Creating Keypads nS Two additional local word registers are used to support the Window Security Level feature e LW9042 is a 16 bit Read Only register which always shows the current window security level 0 1 or 2 e LW9043 is a 16 bit Read Write register that quickly forces the window security level to a lower level by entering the level number For instance if the cu
312. the Y axis by 10 pixels Y axis w reverse No of states Range 1 to 32 scaling Input low This is the lowest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range p 32767 to 32766 Input high This is the highest raw data value that is in the PLC data register Range pasaga 32766 to 32767 Scaling low This is the low scaled value Scaling high This is the high scaled value 5 Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab 7 Click OK The Create Moving Shape Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location on the window 8 Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label This will highlight the entire object Click on the label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Moving Shape Object s Attribute dialog box D The Animation Object The Animation Object is very similar to the Moving Shape Object It also allows you to create a shape or bitmap on a screen that can change the way it loo
313. ting Keypads 209 7 Select Parts Set Bit from the menu listings This displays the Set Bit Object dialog box Create Set Bit Object General Shape Label Description Write address Device type LB w Device address 100 Attribute Style on i 8 Enter the following settings e In the Write Address section e Device Type LB e Device Address 100 e Attribute Style ON 9 Place the Numeric Input Object and the Set Bit Object on top of each other 1010 1001a Rev 02 210 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Setup the Common Window 1 Select Window Open Window from the menu listings This displays the Open Window dialog box Open Window No Window name Size Fast Selection 100 450 Common Window A AB0 10 Initial 640 480 50 NumericKeypad 640 480 2 Highlight Common Window and click Open New Window Task Button 3 This window has already been configured to display a Direct Window Object shown as a 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using and Creating Keypads 211 white outline of a square Double click on the white outline to configure the settings The Direct Window Object s Attributes dialog appears Direct Window Object s Attributes 4 5 rr General Profile Description eypad Container move to relocate keypad Read address Device type LB w Device address 100
314. tion and you need to test the interaction of the project with the PLC It is also very convenient when making minor changes to a project because these changes can be instantly checked for operation When normal on line simulation is used the computer interrogates the PLC through the OIT to access any data required When direct on line simulation is used the computer interrogates the PLC directly Off line simulation does not require any connection to the OIT Because of this off line simulation is most often used when starting a project You can quickly test new ideas and create preliminary screens without the OIT Off line simulation is also great for demonstrating the operation of the OIT and becoming familiar with the operation of the OIT before it is installed If you want to simulate the interaction with a PLC when off line it can be done by creating additional windows on the OIT which allow PLC data input El gt To use off line simulation mode from EasyBuilder 1 Ifthe project has been modified since the last time it was saved and compiled or if it has not yet been compiled it must be saved and compiled before the simulator can start 2 From the Tools menu click Off line Simulation or click the Off line Simulation icon in the Standard toolbar 3 The Simulation Mode screen should appear 4 To end off line simulation press the Space bar or right click in the simulation screen and click Exit wl gt To use on line simu
315. tion of a particular object especially on crowded screens or screens where objects may be overlapping 4 To display the objects attribute dialog box double click the Object ID in the Window Treebar Using the grid function One option is to have the work area covered with grid lines These grid markings can be helpful when trying to align objects that are created on the work area If grid lines are selected you can decide what size each grid is 1 On the Option Menu click Grid Snap then click the Display box or click the Grid icon in the Standard toolbar If you still don t see the grid after you have enabled it make sure that the color of the grid doesn t match the background color of the window currently displayed Changing the grid size 1 On the Option Menu click Grid Snap 2 Select the X spacing and Y spacing for grid size Spacing is measured in pixels Changing the grid color 1 On the Option Menu click Window Property The Window Property dialog box appears 2 Click the pull down box from the Color box The Color dialog box appears 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 45 3 Click on the appropriate color box then click OK The color box should reflect what you have chosen 4 Click OK Another option is to display what are known as Object ID tags Every time you create a new object in EasyBuilder an Object ID tag is assigned to the new object This is done for several re
316. tion of several settings when using the printing capabilities of the OIT For more information see Chapter 15 Using a Printer with the OIT530 550 Message Board Window No Allows selection of the number of the base window which will be used as the message board A setting of 0 disables the message board Use anumber of 10 or higher for this setting For more information on configuring a message board see Chapter 5 Creating Windows Using EZware 500 Indicator Settings Configuration 63 The indicator tab is used to configure different parameters associated with the task bar The task bar contains three optional indicators Touch CPU and Alarm System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux Touch indicator CPU indicator Alam indicator Attribute ET y Non configured area Inactive area o Attribute Enable Attribute Enable Active area Frame Color Color The Touch Indicator Attribute Enables or disables the touch indicator Non configured area Sets the background color of the touch indicator when a non configured area on the touch screen is touched Inactive area Sets the background color of the touch indicator when an inactive area on the touchscreen is touched An inactive area is an area that contains a touchable object that is currently disabled Active
317. to enhance the update rate of data received from the PLC when the PLC registers displayed on a screen are blocked close together The default setting is 0 This means that the OIT sends a command to the PLC requesting data for each register that is displayed on screen For instance if you have five data fields configured on the OIT to monitor R1 R2 R3 R4 and RS of a GE PLC then the OIT sends five separate commands to the PLC to update these fields This is the slowest method of updating the registers but it does have the advantage that the update rate does not depend on having the PLC registers all together R1 R5 In other words if monitoring R1 R10 R65 R156 and R2048 the update rate would be exactly the same as monitoring R1 RS 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 69 The PLC block pack feature allows you to take advantage of any groups or blocks of registers that allow the OIT to send a smaller number of update commands to the PLC to get the information needed The OIT will request data for up to 32 contiguous PLC registers depending upon the PLC block pack setting and the addresses of the PLC registers monitored on screen The PLC block pack represents the maximum number of skips between registers allowed before the OIT considers a PLC register to be part of a different block For example suppose we wish to monitor the following 7 PLC registers on one screen R1 R2 R4 R7 R12 R14 an
318. to the main screen of EasyBuilder From the File menu click Save to permanently save the group to the library When adding new group objects to existing group libraries that come with the EZware 500 software remember that any future upgrade that you receive from Maple Systems may overwrite existing libraries during installation This will delete any new group objects that you have entered Therefore we recommend that you create new libraries to store these group objects or make backup files of the libraries before installing new upgrades If you find that some of the groups included in the libraries are not useful you have the option of deleting them so that they may be replaced by another group gt To delete a group from a library 1 A Bi 9 From the Library menu click Group then Call up library Select the library that the group is located in Click on the group that you wish to delete from the library Click Delete The group is removed from the library Click Close to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder Save the project file to permanently save changes made to the library Caution once a project is saved the group is permanently deleted from the library and cannot be replaced Finally to place a group object onto the work area for use or editing do the following To place a group on the work area I 2 3 4 1010 1001a Rev 02 From the Library menu click Group then Call up library
319. trol was selected first to be Execute macro program Then the device type showed what bit types were available A LB was selected and the address 1 was entered Finally the macro name was selected in older software you would select the macro number instead of the name Below shows the PLC control object attribute window PLC Control Objects Attributes Description Executes the AddTwo Macro when set Read address Device type LB vw Device Address 1 Attribute Type of control Execute macro program Macro name AddTwo PLC Object s Attributes 1010 1001a Rev 02 Macros 247 Project Example of Add 2 Set Bit Object s Attributes General Shape Label Profile Description Add key push to execute AddTwo macro Write address Device type LB w Device address 1 T Aux Attribute Style ON Cancel Help Set Bit Objects Attributes Dialog 1010 1001a Rev 02 248 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual In the example above a set bit object was placed on the screen as a button When this button is pushed it forces LB 1 to ON and the AddTwo macro executes storing the result in LW 2 and turning LB 1 to OFF and the macro stops Variables Declarations and Memory Usage Variables constants amp functions are named by the programmer Variables and constants are called operands Variable names can be any ch
320. ttributes of the XY Plot by double clicking on the part 1010 1001a Rev 02 Capturing Alarms and Events 223 Chapter 11 Capturing Alarms and Events This chapter looks at how the Silver Series uses alarms and events Using Alarms EasyBuilder has three parts that are used to perform alarm functions the Alarm Scan object the Alarm Display object and the Alarm Bar object The Alarm Scan object monitors alarm conditions and alerts the Alarm Display object and the Alarm Bar object when an alarm condition occurs Use the Alarm Display object if you want to display a scrollable list of all alarms that are active Use the Alarm Bar object to display all active alarms on a single horizontally scrolling line like a marquee 7You can also use the Alarm Indicator on the Task Bar to determine if any alarms are active For more information on using the Alarm Indicator refer to the section Using the Task Bar in Chapter 5 Creating Windows Monitoring Alarms with the Alarm Scan Object The Alarm Scan Object continuously monitors PLC coils to determine if an alarm condition has occurred Once an alarm is active the Alarm Scan Object directs a string of characters associated with that alarm to the Alarm Display Object and the Alarm Bar Object for display on the OIT screen gt To create an Alarm Scan Object En 1 From the Parts menu click Alarm Scan Or click the Alarm Scan icon in the Draw toolbar The Alarm Scan Object dialog
321. tup screen when you begin a new project This section will show how to place text in the window and how to create two function keys that will open and close Window 11 To place text on Window 10 1 2 3 Oy a P From the Draw menu click Text The Create Text Object dialog box appears Click the pull down box from the Color box The Color dialog box appears Click on the white color box then click OK The color box should reflect the color that you have chosen Select 16 in the Font box Select Left in the Align box Double click the word text in the Content box and type This is the Startup Screen Click OK On the main screen of EasyBuilder you will see a white rectangle outline that is attached to your cursor in the work area This represents the text box just created Center the rectangle somewhere on the top third portion of the work area and then click The text box This is the Startup Screen should appear gt To create a function key on Window 10 1 DA Pp bo 1010 1001a Rev 02 From the Parts menu click Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box appears Type On Button in the Description box Click Popup Window Type 11 in the Window No Box Click the Shape tab Click Use shape then click Shape library The Shape Library dialog box appears Creating Your First Project 21 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Click button1 in
322. ture use 9030 Message Board Pen width 1 R W I bit to select Pen Width 1 pixel for the Message Board 9031 Message Board Pen width 2 RW Set this bit to select Pen Width 2 pixels for the Message Board feature 9032 Message Board Pen width 3 R W E bit to select Pen Width 3 pixels for the Message Board 9033 9039 Reserved for future use F Set this bit to hide the Fast Selection window clear it to display 9040 Hide Fast SelectionWindow R W the Fast Selection window 9041 Hide TaskBar RIW Ser mis Bit fo nice the TaskBar window clear it to display the 9042 Hide TaskBar Buttons R W A the TaskBar buttons clear it to display the F Set this bit to hide the Fast Selection window the TaskBar 9043 Hide All Fast Select TaskBar R W window and the TaskBar buttons clear it to display the three and TaskBarButtons objects Set this bit ON will restore these system parameters from 9044 Restore system parameters from R W Reserved Recipe Word After a restore the system will clear this recipe words bit off Write Set this bit ON to reset warm boot the OIT After a reset the 9045 Reset OIT only OIT reboots and clears this bit Security Error Latches to a 1 when there is an attempt to enter a 9046 Low Security Level R W higher security level page when the security level is not set User must clear it 9047 9049 Reserved for future use For Toshiba protocol driver When this bit is on write TO as ON Or OFF T1 T1S user s manual NOTE In case of
323. u want to fill the polygon with a solid color then select a color for the Interior box Click Pattern Style to display the Pattern Style dialog box Select the upper left most pattern for a solid color If you want to use a pattern for the filled section of the polygon then select from the available patterns and click OK to exit the Pattern Style dialog box In the Attributes dialog box select the Pattern color 4 Inthe Frame section click the pull down arrow of the Color box and select a color Click OK in the Color dialog box to go back to the Attributes dialog box 5 Click on the line thickness that you want to use 6 Move the mouse cursor over to the work area of EasyBuilder onto the window that you are currently editing The mouse cursor has changed from an arrow to a crosshair cursor 7 Click to mark a corner of the polygon Move the mouse to where another corner of the polygon should be Click the mouse cursor again to mark the corner Continue clicking each corner until it is time to connect the last corner to the first corner of the polygon Right click to complete the polygon The polygon object is formed and displayed on the window screen with small white square blocks around the perimeter of the polygon 8 To continue creating more polygons repeat the last step To move the polygon click on the Select option from the Edit menu or click the Select icon in the Draw toolbar Move the polygon to the preferred location 9 To chang
324. u wish to align For this example select the three rectangle objects of Window_ 12 2 From the Edit menu click Align then Right or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the objects back in their original position gt Using the align top iji command 1 Select the objects you wish to align For this example select the three rectangle objects of Window_ 12 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 53 2 From the Edit menu click Align then Top or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size essi 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the objects back in their original position Using the align bottom all command 1 Select the objects you wish to align For this example select the three rectangle objects of Window_12 2 From the Edit menu click Align then Bottom or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Alignment Nake Same Size Sq 3 From the Edit menu click Undo to put the objects back in their original position Using the align horizontal center command 1 Select the objects you wish to align For this example select the three rectangle objects of Window_ 12 1010 1001a Rev 02 54 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 2 From the Edit menu click Align then Horiz Center or click the appropriate icon from the Manager toolbar Al ignment Make Same Siz
325. u wish to create your own characters you can use the EasyASCHFontMaker program to edit the character sets For more information see the section The EasyASCHFontMaker in Chapter 4 Using EZware 500 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 129 The following illustration shows the various font sizes available To change the font size Font 24 v AA 1 Byclicking onto a text box you can easily change the font size by using the Font box or the Enlarge or Reduce buttons on the Manager toolbar Click on the pull down box of the Font box and select one of the font sizes or Click the Enlarge button to increase the size of the text box by one font size Click the Reduce button to decrease the size of the text box by one font size Note that if the text box overlaps one of the borders of the window when enlarged then the command to enlarge the text box is ignored Gar Go O Predefined Shapes and Bitmaps In addition to using the drawing tools to create your own graphics EasyBuilder provides two types of predefined graphics objects shapes and bitmaps These graphics objects are stored in libraries that come with EasyBuilder more on libraries in the next section Shapes and bitmaps are both used for the same purpose to display a predefined complex graphics object on the OIT screen The difference between shapes and bitmaps is how they are composed and stored Shapes are vector based graphics which are stored
326. unction key to return to previous window 1 From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box is displayed 2 Click Return to Previous 3 Configure the rest of the function key and then click OK 4 Place the function key object onto the full sized base screen 7 Placing a return to previous function key onto a popup window will not work Using a function key to close a window You can configure a function key to close any popup window that is currently displayed on the OIT screen gt Create a function key to close a window From the Parts menu select Function Key The Create Function Key Object dialog box is displayed 2 Click Close Window 3 Configure the rest of the function key and then click OK 4 Place the function key object onto the popup window 2 Placing a close window function key onto a full size base screen will not work Using the Common Window Your project might require that some data be displayed on the OIT screen at all times regardless of which window s are displayed For example you may want to display a company logo on the OIT screen at all times or you may want to display some critical data or an alarm message which should be seen no matter what windows are displayed Using base windows to display this information requires that you configure every full screen base window with the same graphics object The common window however is a predefined wind
327. ure causes the OIT backlight to shut off Set OFF at backlight off Automatically clears a PLC coil when the backlight screen saver feature causes the OIT backlight to shut off Set ON at Enter success valid The Set Bit object must be placed on the same window as the Numeric Input Sets the bit when the numeric keypad s Enter key has been pressed and the data is object success Set OFF at Enter Clears the bit when the numeric keypad s Enter key has been pressed and the data is valid the Set Bit object must be placed on the same window as the Numeric Input object Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab Note that it is not required to use a shape or a bitmap In some modes such as Set ON at window open or Periodical toggle you may prefer to place the part on the window without a shape or bitmap tied to it Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab Click OK The Create Set Bit Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the location on the window that you want it Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label This will highlight the entire object Now click on the label again Now only the label is
328. urn packaging which makes verification impossible will void the warranty Products passing the tests will be returned AS IS to the customer If noncompliance is verified and is not due to customer abuse or the other exceptions described with product warranty Maple Systems will at its option repair or replace the Product returned to it freight prepaid which fail to comply with the foregoing warranty provided Maple Systems is notified of such noncompliance within the two year warranty period APPLICATIONS ASSISTANCE This manual is designed to provide the necessary information for trouble free installation and operation of your new Operator Interface Terminal OIT However if you need assistance please call Maple Systems at 425 745 3229 or visit our web site at www maple systems com Table of Contents EZware Support 1 OIT Models Supported 1 PLCs Supported 1 About Your Documentation 1 Conventions 1 What You Need 2 OIT BOSICS arena 2 What is a Silver Series OIT 4 List of Features 5 Chapter 1 Installation of OlTs 7 Before You Begin 7 Unpacking the Unit 7 Managing Electrostatic Discharge 7 CE Compliance 7 NEMA Rating 7 Environmental Considerations 7 Safety Precautions 8 Control Panel Design Guideline
329. using local registers Local Word and Local Bit the OIT retains the data stored for as long as the OIT is operating Once power is removed all data stored inside the OIT is lost When using Recipe registers Recipe Word and Recipe Bit the OIT retains the data stored even when power is removed The recipe registers data is maintained using the OIT internal battery The following chart shows the memory available in the OIT Name Range Description LW 0 9999 These are internal data registers which can be used to store 16 bit 32 bit or 64 bit Local Word values LB 0 9999 These are internal coil registers which can be used to store two state values Local Bit 9 Ms LW These are internal data registers used for OIT OIT Master Slave communications When you configure a slave OIT with these addresses the slave will read write to the diced dali 0 9999 corresponding LW address in the master OIT This can be used to exchange ocal Word information between slave and master OITs Ms LB These are internal data registers used for OIT OIT Master Slave communications When Master SI 0 9999 you configure a slave OIT with these addresses the slave will read write to the on di ave corresponding LB address in the master OIT This can be used to exchange information ocal Bit between slave and master OITs ci Word 0 32767 Reserved for recipes The address referred to by an RWI device is actually the specified ey on
330. w To change fast selection windows press the CFS11 function key that has been configured to change the fast selection window to Window 11 Window 11 will remain the Fast Selection window until a function key with the Jog FS attribute is used to change the Fast Selection window again or the OIT resets To change back to the default fast selection windows we press 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Windows 117 the CFS04 function key that we have configured to change the fast selection window back to the default fast selection window Window 4 Startup o Hino Window 10 Quinn Using the Task Bar The Task Bar has three purposes e Allows you to minimize popup windows to an icon that is placed in the Window bar e Allows you to access the Fast Selection window that you create e Displays information about the activity of your OIT as an option The Task Bar is optional and must be enabled to see it on the OIT screen gt To activate the task bar 1 From the Edit menu select System Parameters The Set System Parameters dialog box appears 2 Click the General tab to display the General form 3 Inthe Task Button frame click Enable in the Attribute box When enabled the Task Bar should look like the following illustration with the Task Bar enabled 1010 1001a Rev 02 118 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Using the Window Bar The window bar is where the minimized popup window icons reside Y
331. w Use the Up Arrow key to return to the top of the list Using the scrollable window feature on the Alarm Display object allows the OIT operator to see all the currently active alarms without allocating a large area of the OIT screen to see them Displaying Alarms using the Alarm Bar Object The Alarm Bar Object displays alarms scrolling horizontally along a single line The alarm bar continuously scrolls each alarm until the alarm is no longer active If more than one alarm is active the Alarm Bar Object appends each alarm to the string of characters scrolled This part can be used on window screens where space is very limited It also allows you to display long alarm text strings that are too long to be shown in the Alarm Display Object 1010 1001a Rev 02 Capturing Alarms and Events 229 gt To create an Alarm Bar Object Ea 1 From the Parts menu click Alarm Bar Or click the Alarm Bar icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Alarm Bar Object dialog box appears Create Alarm Bar Object x General Description Attribute Display line fi y Char length v Cancel Apply Help 2 Use the Description box to enter a title for the Alarm Bar part A description is not necessary but does help you identify the purpose of the part 3 Inthe Attribute frame select what type of options the Alarm Bar uses Function Range Description Selects the size of the alarm bar Although you can select a size of
332. ware has three main applications e EasyBuilder used to create the project downloaded to the OIT e EasyManager used to place the OIT into different operating modes e EasyASCIIFontMaker used to edit the text fonts that display characters on the OIT gt To start the EZware 500 software 1010 1001a Rev 02 1 2 3 4 From the Windows Task Bar click the Start button point to Programs and then click the EZware 500 folder Click EasyManager to start the EasyManager application Select the appropriate COM port on your computer Select a baud rate of 38400 After you have successfully downloaded a project to the OIT using this baud rate try using 115200 to decrease the required download time 5 6 Click Project Download Upload Click Complete Download Upload After you have downloaded your first project to the OIT you can switch to Partial Download Upload to decrease the required download time 7 8 9 On the EasyManager dialog box click EasyBuilder The Welcome to EasyBuilder dialog box appears Select the correct O T model Click OK to display the main screen of EasyBuilder If the main screen of EasyBuilder is displayed after you click EasyBuilder from the EasyManager dialog box select the correct model of OIT by clicking New from the File menu Creating Your First Project Menu selections Draw toolbar Standard toolbar 19 EE The Edt
333. window 111 Changing the Fast Selection Window 114 Using the Task Bar 117 Using the Window Bar 118 General Settings 119 Creating a Message Board 120 Optional Parameters 121 Chapter 6 Creating Graphic Objects 125 Drawing Objects 125 Using the Drawing Tools 125 Using Text uuu ias iii 128 Predefined Shapes and Bitmaps 129 Using a Predefined Shape 130 Using a Predefined Bitmap 131 Graphics Libraries 133 What are states 134 Using Shape Libraries 134 Using Bitmap Libraries 142 Using Group Libraries 147 Chapter 7 Creating and Using Databases and Languages cece cece eee ee eens 153 Creating and Using the Tag Library 153 Importing and Exporting the Tag Library 6 56 ina 154 Using the Tag Library 155 Creating the Label Library 155 Importing and Exporting the Label Library coo dada Rows 158 Using the Label Library 158 Using Languages with the Label TA oa perce d eee 160 Chapter 8 Representing Data with Graphics Objects ia Bo Sale 163 Using Internal Data Memory of OIT 163 Non volatile Storage of System Parameters 002 eee eee 169 PLC Settings 169 General Settings 169 Security Settings 170 Representing PLC Coil Registers
334. window using a PLC coil The OIT continuously reads the value of the PLC coil to determine if it is set to 1 If so then the predefined popup window is displayed The Indirect Window Object is used to display a popup window using a PLC data register Similar to the PLC Control Object the OIT continuously monitors the selected PLC data register It will display any popup window that corresponds to the number placed into the PLC data register by the PLC The PLC must reference a window that is less than full size when using the Direct Window and Indirect Window object gt To calla popup window using the Direct Window Object 1 From the Parts menu select Direct Window The Create Direct Window Object dialog box appears Create Direct Window Object Ei General Description Read address Device type Le y Device address o E Aur Window No fio y Cancel Apply Help 2 Inthe General Tab select the PLC address according to Device Type and Device Address 3 Inthe same tab enter the Window No you want to call Click OK to return to the main screen of EasyBuilder The mouse cursor will have a square object that represents the size of the popup window 5 Place the Direct Window object where you want the popup window to appear 1010 1001a Rev 02 96 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual 6 You can resize the object after you have placed it or double click on the object to display its
335. y double clicking on the part 1010 1001a Rev 02 218 Silver Series Installation amp Operation Manual Creating Trend Displays The Trend Display Object is used to sample the data in a single or multiple 16 bit PLC registers and plot this data on atime graph You can configure the Trend Display as a single page or with multiple pages that can be viewed by scrolling through the pages The sampling rate and number of plots per page can be customized per trend graph You can display a maximum of 16 channels with varying colors to distinguish the channels Finally a hold feature allows you to freeze the graph and or clear the graph gt To create a Trend Display Object ke 1 From the Parts menu click Trend Display Or click the Trend Display icon in the Part2 toolbar The Create Trend Display Object dialog box appears Create Trend Display Object N E General Trend Page type Single page y Sampling time 1 seconds Plot point 10 Read address Device type LW v Device address 0 lt No of channel 2 Inthe General frame select the following attributes Function Attribute Range Description Single pader Select Single page or Multiple pages Multiple pages configure Page Type M 5 E 9 the trend display as a window to the trend graph in which different ultiple pages segments can be viewed by scrolling Available if Multiple pages is
336. y reads In the Write address frame select the PLC coil or OIT internal memory address that the part writes to when pressed In the Attribute frame select how you want the Toggle Switch object to operate Switch Style Description ON Sets a PLC coil when pressed OFF Clears a PLC coil when pressed Toggle Alternates between setting and clearing a PLC coil Momentary Sets a PLC coil when pressed clears a PLC coil when released 1010 1001a Rev 02 Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Shape tab Refer to the Bit Lamp Object section for information on using the Label tab Click OK The Create Toggle Switch Object form closes and the main screen of EasyBuilder appears with the cursor tied to a rectangular outline of the part you just created at the upper left corner of the screen Move the part to the desired location in the window Once the part is placed onto the window you can adjust the location of the label inside the part by clicking once on the label This will highlight the entire object Now click on the label again Now only the label is highlighted allowing you to move it without moving the Representing Data with Graphics Objects 177 part Note if you double click click twice rapidly then you will not highlight the label but rather enter the Toggle Switch Object s Attribute dialog box Representing PLC Data Registers PLC register
337. y that the shape is located in Click on the shape that you wish to delete from the library Click Delete The shape is removed from the library Click Close to go back to the main screen of EasyBuilder Creating Graphic Objects 141 6 Save the project file to permanently save changes made to the library Caution once project is saved the shape is permanently deleted from the library and cannot be replaced Finally you may want to use all or parts of an existing shape to create a new one To do this you must first place the shape onto the work area of EasyBuilder for editing To place a shape on the work area From the Library menu click Shape then Call up library Select the library that the shape is located in For this example select button1 Click on the shape that you want to place on the work area For this example select item 12 Click Place The main screen of EasyBuilder reappears with the shape in the upper left corner of the work area 5 For this example move the shape to the middle of the work area as shown Font 24 7 A OCOD eee eee OO OCA ee eee eee eee Te PUUN Y 6 Highlight the shape and separate each separate component ppum ca fasi eS Ji J a Ppa ja ji Es 7 As you can see this particular shape is composed of six objects You can edit these objects to change the shape or create a new shape from these objects Please note that you are not actually changing the s
338. yer ing Using the top and bottom Fil layer commands 1 Select one of the layered objects In this example select the layered rectangle from Window_ 12 2 From the Edit menu click Layer then TopLayer or click the TopLayer icon from the Manager toolbar Note that the rectangle completely overlaps the circle and the arc Layering 3 From the Edit menu click Layer then BottomLayer or click the BottomLayer icon from the Manager toolbar Note that the rectangle recedes behind the circle and the arc Layer ing Using the next Ca and previous hl layer commands 1 These two commands can move an object through the various layers of other objects 2 Select one of the layered objects Again select the layered rectangle from Window_12 1010 1001a Rev 02 Using EZware 500 51 3 From the Edit menu click Layer then PreviousLayer or click the PreviousLayer icon from the Manager toolbar Note that the rectangle covers the circle but not the arc Layer ing 4 From the Edit menu click Layer then NextLayer or click the NextLayer icon from the Manager toolbar Note that the rectangle recedes behind the circle and the arc Normally an object that is controlled by a PLC Register i e a Word Lamp Bit Lamp Animation etc is brought to the Top Layer when the value in the PLC Register changes This behavior can be changed by the Part Layout option on the Editor tab of the System Parameters dialog A setting of Cont
339. you may want to close a library so that another one may be opened gt To close or unattach an open group library 1 With the Group Library dialog box displayed click the pull down box of Library Name and choose from one of the open libraries of groups 2 Select which library you would like to close then click Unattach Lib A dialog box appears asking if you really want to unattach the selected library Click Yes 3 The Group Library dialog box reappears and the library is removed from the Group library list The option of creating a new library is also available This can be very useful when organizing groups gt To create a new group library 1 With the Group Library dialog box displayed click New Lib The New Library dialog box appears 2 Enter a name for the new library Click OK 3 The Group Library dialog box appears with the new library loaded Click Close 4 The new library is now available to this project but it is not stored into the Library subdirectory of EasyBuilder until the project file has been saved 1010 1001a Rev 02 Creating Graphic Objects 149 Creating deleting and placing groups Once a complex group object has been created it must be stored permanently into a group library where it can be retrieved and used in multiple projects At any time it is possible to place a group object onto the work area of EasyBuilder for usage or editing gt To add a new group to a library E 1 Highli

4To create a Function Key Object

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents